primergy rx200 s8 - fujitsu technology...

346
Upgrade and Maintenance Manual - English PRIMERGY RX200 S8 Server Upgrade and Maintenance Manual June 2015

Upload: hoangtuyen

Post on 27-May-2018

249 views

Category:

Documents


5 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual - English

PRIMERGY RX200 S8Server Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

June 2015

Page 2: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

Comments… Suggestions… Corrections…The User Documentation Department would like toknow your opinion of this manual. Your feedback helpsus optimize our documentation to suit your individual needs.

Feel free to send us your comments by e-mail to [email protected].

Certified documentation according to DIN EN ISO 9001:2008To ensure a consistently high quality standard anduser-friendliness, this documentation was created tomeet the regulations of a quality management system which complies with the requirements of the standardDIN EN ISO 9001:2008.

cognitas. Gesellschaft für Technik-Dokumentation mbHwww.cognitas.de

Copyright and TrademarksCopyright © 2014 Fujitsu Technology Solutions GmbH.

All rights reserved.Delivery subject to availability; right of technical modifications reserved.

All hardware and software names used are trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

– The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.

– Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights arising from the use of any information in this manual.

– No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of Fujitsu.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Hyper V are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.

Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the USA and other countries.

Page 3: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Before reading this manual

For your safety

This manual contains important information for safely and correctly using this product.

Carefully read the manual before using this product. Pay particular attention to the accompanying manual "Safety Notes and Regulations" and ensure these safety notes are understood before using the product. Keep this manual and the manual "Safety Notes and Regulations" in a safe place for easy reference while using this product.

Radio interference

This product is a "Class A" ITE (Information Technology Equipment). In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take appropriate measures. VCCI-A

Aluminum electrolytic capacitors

The aluminum electrolytic capacitors used in the product's printed circuit board assemblies and in the mouse and keyboard are limited-life components. Use of these components beyond their operating life may result in electrolyte leakage or depletion, potentially causing emission of foul odor or smoke.

As a guideline, in a normal office environment (25°C) operating life is not expected to be reached within the maintenance support period (5 years). However, operating life may be reached more quickly if, for example, the product is used in a hot environment. The customer shall bear the cost of replacing replaceable components which have exceeded their operating life. Note that these are only guidelines, and do not constitute a guarantee of trouble-free operation during the maintenance support period.

High safety use

This product has been designed and manufactured to be used in commercial and/or industrial areas as a server.

When used as visual display workplace, it must not be placed in the direct field of view to avoid incommoding reflections (applies only to TX server systems).

The device has not been designed or manufactured for uses which demand an extremely high level of safety and carry a direct and serious risk of life or body if such safety cannot be assured.

Page 4: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

These uses include control of nuclear reactions in nuclear power plants, automatic airplane flight control, air traffic control, traffic control in mass transport systems, medical devices for life support, and missile guidance control in weapons systems (hereafter, "high safety use"). Customers should not use this product for high safety use unless measures are in place for ensuring the level of safety demanded of such use. Please consult the sales staff of Fujitsu if intending to use this product for high safety use.

Measures against momentary voltage drop

This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop in the power supply caused by lightning. To prevent a momentary voltage drop, use of an AC uninterruptible power supply is recommended.

(This notice follows the guidelines of Voltage Dip Immunity of Personal Computer issued by JEITA, the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association.)

Technology controlled by the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan

Documents produced by Fujitsu may contain technology controlled by the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan. Documents which contain such technology should not be exported from Japan or transferred to non-residents of Japan without first obtaining authorization in accordance with the above law.

Harmonic Current Standards

This product conforms to harmonic current standard JIS C 61000-3-2.

Only for the Japanese market:About SATA hard disk drives

The SATA version of this server supports hard disk drives with SATA / BC-SATA storage interfaces. Please note that the usage and operation conditions differ depending on the type of hard disk drive used.

Please refer to the following internet address for further information on the usage and operation conditions of each available type of hard disk drive:

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/harddisk/

Page 5: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Only for the Japanese market:

I Although described in this manual, some sections do not apply to the Japanese market. These options and routines include:

– CSS (Customer Self Service)

Page 6: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Version history

Issue number Reason for update

1.0 / July 2013 Initial release

2.0 / October 2013

Added ambient temperature for Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design, updated "Performing a RAID array rebuild", updated "Equipping the PCIe slots", added figure "Routing the front LAN cable"

3.0 / February 2014 Energy Star removed, software procedures updated

4.0 / August 2014 New behavior ID and Power-on indicator

5.0 / April 2015 iRMC microSD card

Page 7: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

1.1 Notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

2 Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2.1 Classification of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.1.1 Customer Replaceable Units (CRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.1.2 Upgrade and Repair Units (URU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242.1.3 Field Replaceable Units (FRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.2 Average task duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2.3 Tools you need at hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.4 Documents you need at hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.2 CE conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3.3 FCC Class A Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3.4 Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

4 Basic hardware procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

4.1 Using diagnostics information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434.1.1 Locating the defective server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434.1.2 Determining the error class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444.1.2.1 Global Error indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444.1.2.2 Customer Self Service (CSS) indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 444.1.3 Locating the defective component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454.1.3.1 Local diagnostic indicators on the front . . . . . . . . . . . 454.1.3.2 Local diagnostic indicators on the system board . . . . . . . 45

4.2 Shutting down the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

4.3 Disconnecting the server from the mains . . . . . . . . . . 47

Page 8: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Contents

4.4 Getting access to the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474.4.1 Extending the server out of the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484.4.2 Removing the server from the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494.4.3 Removing the fan cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514.4.4 Removing the housing cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.5 Reassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524.5.1 Installing the housing cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524.5.2 Installing the fan cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534.5.3 Mounting the server in the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544.5.4 Sliding the server into the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

4.6 Connecting the server to the mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.7 Switching on the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.8 Handling riser modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.9 Handling the air duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

5 Basic software procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

5.1 Starting the maintenance task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635.1.1 Suspending BitLocker functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635.1.2 Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality . . . . . . . . . . . 645.1.2.1 Viewing boot watchdog settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645.1.2.2 Configuring boot watchdog settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655.1.3 Removing backup and optical disk media . . . . . . . . . . . . 665.1.4 Verifying and configuring the backup software solution . . . . . . 675.1.5 Note on server maintenance in a Multipath I/O environment . . . 675.1.6 Switching on the ID indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

5.2 Completing the maintenance task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715.2.1 Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC . . . . 715.2.1.1 Updating or recovering the system board BIOS . . . . . . . . 715.2.1.2 Updating or recovering the iRMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715.2.2 Verifying system information backup / restore . . . . . . . . . . 735.2.3 Updating RAID controller firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745.2.4 Enabling Option ROM scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755.2.5 Verifying and configuring the backup software solution . . . . . . 765.2.6 Resetting the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775.2.6.1 Viewing the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775.2.6.2 Resetting the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775.2.7 Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Page 9: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

5.2.8 Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS . . . . . . . 795.2.9 Verifying the memory mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805.2.10 Verifying the system time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805.2.11 Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL) . . . . . . . 815.2.11.1 Viewing the SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815.2.11.2 Clearing the SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825.2.12 Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment . . . 835.2.13 Resuming BitLocker functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845.2.14 Performing a RAID array rebuild . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855.2.15 Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses . . . . . . . . . . 865.2.15.1 Looking up MAC addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865.2.15.2 Looking up WWN addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865.2.16 Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875.2.17 Configuring LAN teaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885.2.17.1 After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers . . . . . . . . . 885.2.17.2 After replacing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895.2.18 Switching off the ID indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895.2.19 Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan . . . . . . 90

6 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

6.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

6.2 Installing a power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956.2.2 Removing the dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956.2.3 Installing the power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

6.3 Removing a power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006.3.2 Removing a power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006.3.3 Installing the dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

6.4 Replacing a power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026.4.2 Removing the defective power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . 1026.4.3 Installing the new power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

6.5 Replacing the power distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . 1036.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Page 10: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Contents

6.5.2 Removing the defective power distribution board . . . . . . . . 1046.5.3 Installing the new power distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . 1056.5.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

7 Hard disk drives / solid state drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

7.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107.1.1 General equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107.1.2 Configuration with up to four HDD/SSD modules . . . . . . . . 1117.1.3 Configuration with up to eight HDD/SSD modules . . . . . . . 111

7.2 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127.2.2 Removing the 2.5-inch dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137.2.3 Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

7.3 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . 1157.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157.3.2 Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . 1167.3.3 Installing the 2.5-inch dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

7.4 Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . 1177.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187.4.2 Removing the defective 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . 1187.4.3 Installing the new 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . 1187.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

7.5 Replacing the 4xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197.5.2 Removing the defective 4xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 1197.5.3 Installing the new 4xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217.5.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

7.6 Replacing the 8xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227.6.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227.6.2 Removing the defective 8xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 1237.6.3 Installing the new 8xHDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257.6.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

7.7 Converting to configuration up to eight HDD/SSD modules 1277.7.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277.7.2 Removing the 4xHDD backplane and the ODD cage . . . . . . 127

Page 11: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

7.7.3 Installing the 2xHDD cage and the 8xHDD backplane . . . . . 1297.7.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

8 Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

8.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

8.2 Replacing a fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358.2.2 Removing the defective fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358.2.3 Installing the new fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

9 Expansion cards and backup units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

9.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389.1.1 Equipping the PCIe slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

9.2 Handling slot brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429.2.1 Installing a slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429.2.2 Removing a slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

9.3 Handling SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489.3.1 Installing SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489.3.2 Removing an SFP+ transceiver module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

9.4 Expansion cards and riser cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549.4.1 Installing an expansion card - slot 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549.4.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549.4.1.2 Removing the slot cover - slot 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559.4.1.3 Installing the expansion card - slot 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569.4.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589.4.2 Installing an expansion card - slot 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599.4.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599.4.2.2 Installing the expansion card - slot 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599.4.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609.4.3 Removing an expansion card - slot 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619.4.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619.4.3.2 Removing the expansion card - slot 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . 1619.4.3.3 Installing the slot cover - slot 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639.4.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649.4.4 Removing an expansion card - slot 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649.4.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Page 12: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Contents

9.4.4.2 Removing the expansion card - slot 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649.4.4.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659.4.5 Replacing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669.4.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669.4.5.2 Removing the defective expansion card . . . . . . . . . . 1669.4.5.3 Installing the new expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679.4.5.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679.4.6 Replacing a riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689.4.6.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689.4.6.2 Removing the defective riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689.4.6.3 Installing the new riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709.4.6.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719.4.7 Replacing TFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729.4.7.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729.4.7.2 Removing the defective TFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729.4.7.3 Installing the new TFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739.4.7.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

9.5 Backup units (BBU/FBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749.5.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749.5.2 Installing a BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749.5.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749.5.2.2 Connecting the BBU cable to the BBU . . . . . . . . . . . 1749.5.2.3 Installing the BBU in the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759.5.2.4 Installing the BBU with the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769.5.2.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789.5.3 Installing an FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799.5.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799.5.3.2 Installing TFM to the RAID controller (if applicable) . . . . . 1809.5.3.3 Installing the FBU in the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1819.5.3.4 Connecting the FBU cable to the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . 1829.5.3.5 Installing the FBU with the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1829.5.3.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1859.5.4 Removing a BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1859.5.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1859.5.4.2 Removing the BBU with the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1869.5.4.3 Removing the BBU from the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1889.5.4.4 Disconnecting the BBU cable from the BBU . . . . . . . . 1889.5.4.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899.5.5 Removing an FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899.5.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899.5.5.2 Removing the FBU with the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Page 13: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

9.5.5.3 Disconnecting the FBU cable from the FBU . . . . . . . . . 1919.5.5.4 Removing the FBU from the holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1919.5.5.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1929.5.6 Replacing a BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1929.5.6.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1929.5.6.2 Removing the defective BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1929.5.6.3 Installing the new BBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939.5.6.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939.5.7 Replacing an FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949.5.7.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949.5.7.2 Removing the defective FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949.5.7.3 Installing the new FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1959.5.7.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

10 Main memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

10.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19810.1.1 Memory sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20010.1.1.1 Population rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20010.1.1.2 Independant Channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20110.1.1.3 Mirrored Channel and Performance modes . . . . . . . . . 20210.1.1.4 Rank Sparing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

10.2 Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20710.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20710.2.2 Selecting the memory slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20710.2.3 Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20810.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

10.3 Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20910.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20910.3.2 Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20910.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

10.4 Replacing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21010.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21010.4.2 Removing the defective memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . 21010.4.3 Installing the new memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21110.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

11 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Page 14: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Contents

11.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21411.1.1 Supported processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21411.1.2 General equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

11.2 Upgrading to dual processor configuration . . . . . . . . . 21511.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21511.2.2 Installing the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21611.2.3 Installing the heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22111.2.4 Upgrading the main memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22211.2.5 Installing two additional fan modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22311.2.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

11.3 Replacing a processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22411.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22411.3.2 Removing the heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22511.3.3 Removing the defective processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22611.3.4 Installing the new processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22911.3.5 Applying the thermal paste to the processor surface . . . . . . 23111.3.6 Installing the heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23311.3.7 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

11.4 Replacing a heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23411.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23511.4.2 Removing the defective heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23511.4.3 Installing the new heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23511.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

12 Optical disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

12.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

12.2 Installing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23812.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23812.2.2 Removing the dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23812.2.3 Installing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24012.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

12.3 Removing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24112.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24112.3.2 Removing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24212.3.3 Installing the dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24312.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

12.4 Replacing the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Page 15: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

12.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24412.4.2 Removing the defective ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24412.4.3 Installing the new ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24512.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

13 Front panel and front VGA/LAN module . . . . . . . . . . . 247

13.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

13.2 Installing the front VGA and/or front LAN . . . . . . . . . . 24813.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24813.2.2 Removing the front VGA/LAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24813.2.3 Removing the covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24913.2.4 Installing the front connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24913.2.5 Installing the front VGA/LAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25213.2.6 Connecting the front VGA cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25313.2.7 Connecting the front LAN cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25313.2.8 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25413.2.9 Using the front management LAN connector . . . . . . . . . . 255

13.3 Removing the front VGA and/or front LAN . . . . . . . . . . 25613.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25613.3.2 Disconnecting the front LAN cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25613.3.3 Disconnecting the front VGA cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25713.3.4 Removing the front VGA/LAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25813.3.5 Removing the front connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25813.3.6 Installing the front VGA/LAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26113.3.7 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

13.4 Replacing the front VGA and/or front LAN cable . . . . . . 26213.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26213.4.2 Removing the defective front VGA and/or front LAN cable . . . 26213.4.3 Installing the new front VGA and/or front LAN cable . . . . . . 26313.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

13.5 Replacing the front LAN card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26313.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26313.5.2 Removing the defective front LAN card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26413.5.3 Installing the new front LAN card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26413.5.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

13.6 Replacing the front panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26513.6.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26513.6.2 Removing the defective front panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Page 16: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Contents

13.6.3 Installing the new front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27013.6.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

14 Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

14.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

14.2 Installing the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27514.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27614.2.2 Removing the slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27614.2.3 Installing the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27614.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

14.3 Removing the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27814.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27814.3.2 Removing the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27814.3.3 Installing the slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27914.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

14.4 Replacing the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28014.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28014.4.2 Removing the defective serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28014.4.3 Installing the new serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28014.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

15 System board and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

15.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

15.2 Replacing the CMOS battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28215.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28215.2.2 Replacing the defective CMOS battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28315.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

15.3 USB Flash Module (UFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28415.3.1 Installing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28415.3.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28415.3.1.2 Installing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28415.3.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28515.3.1.4 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28615.3.2 Removing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28615.3.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28615.3.2.2 Removing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Page 17: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

15.3.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28815.3.3 Replacing the UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28915.3.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28915.3.3.2 Removing the defective UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28915.3.3.3 Installing the new UFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29015.3.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29015.3.3.5 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

15.4 Trusted Platform Module (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29115.4.1 Installing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29115.4.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29115.4.1.2 Installing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29215.4.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29415.4.2 Removing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29515.4.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29515.4.2.2 Removing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29715.4.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29815.4.3 Replacing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29915.4.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29915.4.3.2 Removing the defective TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30015.4.3.3 Installing the new TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30015.4.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

15.5 Onboard SAS enabling key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30115.5.1 Installing the onboard SAS enabling key . . . . . . . . . . . . 30115.5.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30115.5.1.2 Installing the onboard SAS enabling key . . . . . . . . . . . 30115.5.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30215.5.2 Removing the onboard SAS enabling key . . . . . . . . . . . . 30315.5.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30315.5.2.2 Removing the onboard SAS enabling key . . . . . . . . . . 30315.5.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30315.5.3 Replacing the onboard SAS enabling key . . . . . . . . . . . . 30415.5.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30415.5.3.2 Replacing the onboard SAS enabling key . . . . . . . . . . 30415.5.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

15.6 iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30515.6.1 Installing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30515.6.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30515.6.1.2 Installing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30615.6.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30715.6.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30715.6.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Page 18: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Contents

15.6.2.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30815.6.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30815.6.3 Replacing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30915.6.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30915.6.3.2 Replacing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30915.6.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

15.7 Replacing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31015.7.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31215.7.2 Removing the defective system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31315.7.3 Installing the new system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31615.7.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

16 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

16.1 Overview cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

16.2 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

17 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

17.1 Mechanical overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32917.1.1 Server front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32917.1.2 Server rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33017.1.3 Server interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

17.2 Connectors and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33317.2.1 Connectors and indicators on the system board . . . . . . . . 33317.2.1.1 Onboard connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33317.2.1.2 Onboard indicators and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33517.2.1.3 I/O panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33717.2.1.4 I/O panel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33817.2.1.5 Indicators on power supply units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33917.2.2 Indicators on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

17.3 Onboard settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

17.4 Minimum startup configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Page 19: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 19

1 Introduction

This Upgrade and Maintenance Manual provides instructions for the following procedures:

● Upgrading the server configuration by adding optional hardware components

● Upgrading the server configuration by replacing existing hardware components with superior ones.

● Replacing defective hardware components

This manual focuses on on-site maintenance tasks. It is recommended to prepare each service assignment following remote diagnostics procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual (see section "Documents you need at hand" on page 28).

V CAUTION!

The document at hand comprises procedures of a wide range of complexity. Check the profile of qualification for technicians before assigning tasks. Before you start, carefully read "Classification of procedures" on page 23.

Page 20: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

20 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Introduction

1.1 Notational conventions

The following notational conventions are used in this manual:

Text in italics indicates commands or menu items

fixed font indicates system output

semi-bold fixed font

indicates text to be entered by the user

"Quotation marks" indicate names of chapters and terms that are being emphasized

Ê describes activities that must be performed in the order shown

[Abc] indicates keys on the keyboard

V CAUTION! Pay particular attention to texts marked with this symbol! Failure to observe this warning may endanger your life, destroy the system or lead to the loss of data.

I indicates additional information, notes and tips

indicates the procedure category in terms of complexity and qualification requirements, see "Classification of procedures" on page 23

indicates the average task duration, see "Average task duration" on page 26

Page 21: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 21

2 Before you start

Before you start any upgrade or maintenance task, please proceed as follows:

Ê Carefully read the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on page 31.

Ê Make sure that all necessary manuals are available. Refer to the documentation overview in section "Documents you need at hand" on page 28. Print the PDF files if required.

Ê Make yourself familiar with the procedure categories introduced in section "Classification of procedures" on page 23.

Ê Ensure that all required tools are available according to section "Tools you need at hand" on page 27.

V CAUTION

In a system that has the Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design option, only components that support the higher operating range may be installed. Further information on this is available in the configurator.

Installing optional components

The "PRIMERGY RX200 S8 Server Operating manual" gives an introduction to server features and provides an overview of available hardware options.

Use the Fujitsu ServerView Suite management software and the iRMC web frontend to prepare hardware expansions. ServerView Suite documentation is available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com (http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/ for the Japanese market). Please refer to the following ServerView Suite topics:

– Operation– Virtualization– Maintenance– Out-Of-Band Management

The Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design option can only be ordered from the manufacturer and is indicated by the logo on the identification rating plate.

Page 22: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

22 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Before you start

I For the latest information on hardware options, refer to your server’s hardware configurator available online at the following address:for the EMEA market:http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html for the Japanese market:http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/

Please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner for details on how to order expansion kits or spare parts. Use the Fujitsu Illustrated Spares Catalog to identify the required spare part and obtain technical data and order information. Illustrated Spares catalogs are available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com/illustrated_spares (EMEA market only).

Replacing a defective component

The global error indicators on the front and rear sides of your server as well as local diagnostic LEDs on the front panel report defective hardware components that need to be replaced. For further information on the controls and indicators of your server, refer to the operating manual of your server and section "Connectors and indicators" on page 333.

If the system has been powered off in order to replace a non-hot plug unit, a system of PRIMERGY diagnostic indicators guides you to the defective component. The "Indicate CSS" button enables the indicator next to the defective component even if the server has been switched off and disconnected from the mains. For further information, please refer to sections "Using diagnostics information" on page 43 and "Indicators on the front panel" on page 340.

If the defective component is a customer replaceable unit included in the CSS concept (Customer Self Service, only available for EMEA market), the CSS indicators on the front and rear side of the server will light up.

For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com (EMEA market) or http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/ (Japanese market).

It is recommended to prepare local maintenance tasks using remote diagnostics procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual.

Page 23: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 23

Before you start

2.1 Classification of procedures

The complexity of maintenance procedures varies significantly. Procedures have been assigned to one of three unit categories, indicating the level of difficulty and required qualification.

At the beginning of each procedure, the involved unit type is indicated by one of the symbols introduced in this section.

I Please ask your local Fujitsu service center for more detailed information.

2.1.1 Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)

Customer Replaceable Units are intended for customer self service and may be installed or replaced as hot-plug components during operation.

I Components that the customer is entitled to replace may differ according to the service form in his country.

Hot-plug components increase system availability and guarantee a high degree of data integrity and fail-safe performance. Procedures can be carried out without shutting down the server or going offline.

Components that are handled as Customer Replaceable Units

– Hot-plug power supply units– Hot-plug fan modules– Hot-plug HDD / SSD modules

Peripherals that are handled as Customer Replaceable Units

– Keyboard– Mouse

Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)

Page 24: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

24 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Before you start

2.1.2 Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)

Upgrade and Repair Units are non hot-plug components that can be ordered separately to be installed as options (Upgrade Units) or are available to the customer through customer self service (Repair Units).

I Server management error messages and diagnostic indicators on the front panel and system board will report defective Upgrade and Repair Units as customer replaceable CSS components.

Upgrade and repair procedures involve shutting down and opening the server.

V CAUTION!

The device may be seriously damaged or cause damage if it is opened without authorization or if repairs are attempted by unauthorized and untrained personnel.

Components that are handled as Upgrade Units

– Processors (upgrade kits)– Optical disk drives– Expansion cards– Battery backup units– Memory modules– Front LAN/VGA module

Components that are handled solely as Repair Units

– CMOS battery

Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)

Page 25: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 25

Before you start

2.1.3 Field Replaceable Units (FRU)

Removing and installing Field Replaceable Units involves complex maintenance procedures on integral server components. Procedures will require shutting down, opening and disassembling the server.

V CAUTION!

Maintenance procedures involving Field Replaceable Units must be performed exclusively by Fujitsu service personnel or technicians trained by Fujitsu. Please note that unauthorized interference with the system will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.

Components that are handled as Field Replaceable Units

– Processor (replacement)– SAS / SATA backplanes– Power distribution board– Front panel module– Management and diagnostics modules– System board– Standard power supply unit– Trusted Platform Module (TPM)– USB Flash Module (UFM)

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)

Page 26: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

26 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Before you start

2.2 Average task duration

The average task duration including preliminary and concluding steps is indicated at the beginning of each procedure next to the procedure class.Refer to table 1 on page 26 for an overview of steps taken into account for calculating the average task duration:

Hardware: 10 minutes

Step included Explanation

Server shutdown no

Shutdown time depends on hardware and software configuration and may vary significantly.Software tasks necessary before maintenance are described in section "Starting the maintenance task" on page 63.

Rack removal, disassembly

yesmaking the server available, removing the server from the rack (if applicable)

Transport noTransporting the server to the service table (where required) depends on local customer conditions.

Maintenance procedures

yesmaintenance procedures including preliminary and concluding software tasks

Transport noReturning the server to its installation site (where required) depends on local customer conditions.

Assembly, rack installation

yesreassembling the server, installing the server in the rack (if applicable)

Starting up noBooting time depends on hardware and software configuration and may vary significantly.

Table 1: Calculation of the average task duration

Page 27: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 27

Before you start

2.3 Tools you need at hand

When preparing the maintenance task, ensure that all required tools are available according to the overview below. You will find a list of required tools at the beginning of each procedure.

Screw driver/bit insert

Screw Usage Type

PhillipsPH2 / (+) No. 2

Chassis

M3 x 4.5 mm(silver)

C26192-Y10-C67

PhillipsPH2 / (+) No. 2

System board

M3 x 6 mm(silver)

C26192-Y10-C68

Special bit insert TPM screw

REM 3 x 15 mm(black)

C26192-Y10-C176

PhillipsPH1 / (+) No. 1

UFM nylon screw

M3 x 4.5 mm(white)

A3C40109082

PhillipsPH1 / (+) No. 1

TFM module M2.5 x 4 mm(silver)

C26192-Y10-C103

Table 2: List of used screws (not applicable for the Japanese market)

Page 28: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

28 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Before you start

2.4 Documents you need at hand

Maintenance procedures may include references to additional documentation. When preparing the maintenance task, ensure that all required manuals are available according to the overview below.

I – Ensure to store all printed manuals enclosed with your server in a save place for future reference.

– Unless stated otherwise, all manuals are available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com under x86 Servers.For the Japanese market please use the following address: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/

Document Description

"Quick Start Hardware - PRIMERGY Server RX200 S8" leaflet

Quick installation poster for initial operation, available online

"ServerView Quick Start Guide""ServerView クイックスタートガイド " for the Japanese market

Information on initial server setup and software configuration, available online

"Safety notes and regulations" manual" 安全上のご注意 " for the Japanese market

Important safety information, available online or as a printed copy

"PRIMERGY RX200 S8 Server Operating Manual"

Available online

"D3302 BIOS Setup Utility for PRIMERGY RX200 S8 Reference Manual"

Information on configurable BIOS options and parameters, available online

System board labelLabel inside the housing cover outlining connectors, indicators and jumper

Software documentation

– "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" user guide

– "ServerView Operations Manager - Server Management" user guide

– "iRMC S4 - Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guide

Table 3: Documentation you need at hand

Page 29: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 29

Before you start

Illustrated Spares catalog

Spare parts identification and information system (EMEA market only), available for online use or download (Windows OS) at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com/illustrated_spares or from the CSS component view of the ServerView Operations Manager

Glossary Available online

"Warranty" manual" 保証書 " for the Japanese market

Important information on warranty regulations, recycling and service, available online or as a printed copy

"Returning used devices" manual

Recycling and contact information, available online or as a printed copy"Service Desk" leaflet

" サポート&サービス " for the Japanese market

Additional documentation

RAID documentation, available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com underx86 Servers - Expansion Cards - Storage Adapters, e.g.:

– "Integrated RAID for SAS" User Guide– "LSI MegaRAID - SAS Software" User

Guide– "Modular RAID Controller / Modular

SAS HBA" Installation Guide

For the Japanese market please use the following address: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/manual/

Third party documentation– Operating system documentation,

online help– Peripherals documentation

Document Description

Table 3: Documentation you need at hand

Page 30: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

30 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Before you start

Page 31: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 31

3 Important information

V CAUTION!

Before installing and starting up a device, please observe the safety instructions listed in the following section. This will help you to avoid making serious errors that could impair your health, damage the device and endanger the data base.

3.1 Safety instructions

I The following safety instructions are also provided in the manual "Safety Notes and Regulations" or " 安全上のご注意 ".

This device meets the relevant safety regulations for IT equipment. If you have any questions about whether you can install the server in the intended environment, please contact your sales outlet or our customer service team.

● The actions described in this manual shall be performed by technical specialists. A technical specialist is a person who is trained to install the server including hardware and software.

● Repairs to the device that do not relate to CSS failures shall be performed by service personnel. Please note that unauthorized interference with the system will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.

● Any failure to observe the guidelines in this manual, and any improper repairs could expose the user to risks (electric shock, energy hazards, fire hazards) or damage the equipment.

● Before installing/removing internal options to/from the server, turn off the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cords from the power outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock or damage.

Page 32: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

32 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Important information

Before starting up

● During installation and before operating the device, observe the instructions on environmental conditions for your device.

● If the device is brought in from a cold environment, condensation may form both inside and on the outside of the device.

Wait until the device has acclimatized to room temperature and is absolutely dry before starting it up. Material damage may be caused to the device if this requirement is not observed.

● Transport the device only in the original packaging or in packaging that protects it from knocks and jolts.For the Japanese market, transporting the device in its original packaging does not apply.

Installation and operation

● This unit should not be operated in ambient temperatures above 35 °C. For servers with Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design the ambient temperature can increase to 40 °C.

● If the unit is integrated into an installation that draws power from an industrial power supply network with an IEC309 connector, the power supply's fuse protection must comply with the requirements for non-industrial power supply networks for type A connectors.

● The unit automatically adjusts itself to a mains voltage in a range of 100 V - 240 V (Platinum) or 200 V - 240 V (Titanium). Ensure that the local mains voltage lies within these limits.

● This device must only be connected to properly grounded power outlets or connected to the grounded rack internal power distribution system with tested and approved power cords.

● Ensure that the device is connected to a properly grounded power outlet close to the device.

● Ensure that the power sockets on the device and the properly grounded power outlets are easily accessible.

● The On/Off button or the main power switch (if present) does not isolate the device from the mains power supply. In case of repair or servicing disconnect the device completely from the mains power supply, unplug all power plugs from the properly grounded power outlets.

Page 33: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 33

Important information

● Always connect the server and the attached peripherals to the same power circuit. Otherwise you run the risk of losing data if, for example, the server is still running but a peripheral device (e.g. memory subsystem) fails during a power outage.

● Data cables must be adequately shielded.

● Ethernet cabling has to comply with EN 50173 and EN 50174-1/2 standards or ISO/IEC 11801 standard respectively. The minimum requirement is a Category 5 shielded cable for 10/100 Ethernet, or a Category 5e cable for Gigabit Ethernet.

● Route the cables in such a way that they do not create a potential hazard (make sure no-one can trip over them) and that they cannot be damaged. When connecting the server, refer to the relevant instructions in this manual.

● Never connect or disconnect data transmission lines during a storm (risk of lightning hazard).

● Make sure that no objects (e.g. jewelry, paperclips etc.) or liquids can get inside the server (risk of electric shock, short circuit).

● In emergencies (e.g. damaged casing, controls or cables, penetration of liquids or foreign bodies), contact the system administrator or your customer service team. Only disconnect the system from the mains power supply if there is no risk of harming yourself.

● Proper operation of the system (in accordance with IEC 60950-1 resp. EN 60950-1) is only ensured if the casing is completely assembled and the rear covers for the installation slots have been fitted (electric shock, cooling, fire protection, interference suppression).

● Only install system expansions that satisfy the requirements and rules governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility and those relating to telecommunication terminals. If you install other expansions, they may damage the system or violate the safety regulations. Information on which system expansions are approved for installation can be obtained from our customer service center or your sales outlet.

● The components marked with a warning notice (e.g. lightning symbol) may only be opened, removed or exchanged by authorized, qualified personnel. Exception: CSS components can be replaced.

● The warranty is void if the server is damaged during installation or replacement of system expansions.

Page 34: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

34 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Important information

● Only set screen resolutions and refresh rates that are specified in the operating manual for the monitor. Otherwise, you may damage your monitor. If you are in any doubt, contact your sales outlet or customer service center.

● Before installing/removing internal options to/from the server, turn off the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cords from the outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock.

● Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock and will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.

● Devices inside the server remain hot after shutdown. Wait for a while after shutdown before installing or removing internal options.

● The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. To ensure reliable protection, if you are wearing an earthing band on your wrist when working with this type of module, connect it to an unpainted, conducting metal part of the system.

● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edges of the circuit boards.

● Install the screw removed during installation/detaching internal options in former device/position. To use a screw of the different kind can cause a breakdown of equipment.

● The installation indicated on this document is sometimes changed to the kind of possible options without notice.

Batteries

● Incorrect replacement of batteries may lead to a risk of explosion. The batteries may only be replaced with identical batteries or with a type recommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not throw batteries into the trash can.

● Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

● Make sure that you insert the battery the right way round.

● The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not disassemble, heat about 100 °C (212F), or incinerate the battery.

Page 35: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 35

Important information

● All batteries containing pollutants are marked with a symbol (a crossed-out garbage can). In addition, the marking is provided with the chemical symbol of the heavy metal decisive for the classification as a pollutant:

Cd Cadmium Hg Mercury Pb Lead

Working with CDs/DVDs/BDs and optical drives

When working with devices with optical drives, these instructions must be followed.

V CAUTION!

● Only use CDs/DVDs/BDs that are in perfect condition, in order to prevent data loss, equipment damage and injury.

● Check each CD/DVD/BD for damage, cracks, breakages etc. before inserting it in the drive.

Note that any additional labels applied may change the mechanical properties of a CD/DVD/BD and cause imbalance.

Damaged and imbalanced CDs/DVDs/BDs can break at high drive speeds (data loss).

Under certain circumstances, sharp CD/DVD/BD fragments can pierce the cover of the optical drive (equipment damage) and can fly out of the device (danger of injury, particularly to uncovered body parts such as the face or neck).

● High humidity and airborne dust levels are to be avoided. Electric shocks and/or server failures may be caused by liquids such as water, or metallic items, such as paper clips, entering a drive.

● Shocks and vibrations are also to be avoided.

● Do not insert any objects other than the specified CDs/DVDs/BDs.

● Do not pull on, press hard, or otherwise handle the CD/DVD/BD tray roughly.

● Do not disassemble the optical drive.

● Before use, clean the optical disk tray using a soft, dry cloth.

Page 36: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

36 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Important information

● As a precaution, remove disks from the optical drive when the drive is not to be used for a long time. Keep the optical disk tray closed to prevent foreign matter, such as dust, from entering the optical drive.

● Hold CDs/DVDs/BDs by their edges to avoid contact with the disk surface.

● Do not contaminate the CD/DVD/BD surface with fingerprints, oil, dust, etc. If dirty, clean with a soft, dry cloth, wiping from the center to the edge. Do not use benzene, thinners, water, record sprays, antistatic agents, or silicone-impregnated cloth.

● Be careful not to damage the CD/DVD/BD surface.

● Keep the CDs/DVDs/BDs away from heat sources.

● Do not bend or place heavy objects on CDs/DVDs/BDs.

● Do not write with ballpoint pen or pencil on the label (printed) side.

● Do not attach stickers or similar to the label side. Doing so may cause rotational eccentricity and abnormal vibrations.

● When a CD/DVD/BD is moved from a cold place to a warm place, moisture condensation on the CD/DVD/BD surface can cause data read errors. In this case, wipe the CD/DVD/BD with a soft, dry cloth then let it air dry. Do not dry the CD/DVD/BD using devices such as a hair dryer.

● To avoid dust, damage, and deformation, keep the CD/DVD/BD in its case whenever it is not in use.

● Do not store CDs/DVDs/BDs at high temperatures. Areas exposed to prolonged direct sunlight or near heating appliances are to be avoided.

I You can prevent damage from the optical drive and the CDs/DVDs/BDs, as well as premature wear of the disks, by observing the following suggestions:

– Only insert disks in the drive when needed and remove them after use.

– Store the disks in suitable sleeves.– Protect the disks from exposure to heat and direct sunlight.

Laser information

The optical drive complies with IEC 60825-1 laser class 1.

Page 37: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 37

Important information

V CAUTION!

The optical drive contains a light-emitting diode (LED), which under certain circumstances produces a laser beam stronger than laser class 1. Looking directly at this beam is dangerous.

Never remove parts of the optical drive casing!

Modules with Electrostatic-Sensitive Devices

Modules with electrostatic-sensitive devices are identified by the following sticker:

Figure 1: ESD label

When you handle components fitted with ESDs, you must always observe the following points:

● Switch off the system and remove the power plugs from the power outlets before installing or removing components with ESDs.

● You must always discharge static build-up (e.g. by touching a grounded object) before working with such components.

● Any devices or tools that are used must be free of electrostatic charge.

● Wear a suitable grounding cable that connects you to the external chassis of the system unit.

● Always hold components with ESDs at the edges or at the points marked green (touch points).

● Do not touch any connectors or conduction paths on an ESD.

● Place all the components on a pad which is free of electrostatic charge.

I For a detailed description of how to handle ESD components, see the relevant European or international standards (EN 61340-5-1, ANSI/ESD S20.20).

Page 38: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

38 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Important information

Transporting the server

● Only transport the server in its original packaging or in packaging that protects it from impacts and jolts. For the Japanese market, transporting the device in its original packaging does not apply.

● Do not unpack the server until it is at its installation location.

● If you need to lift or transport the server, ask other people to help you.

Notes on installing the server in the rack

● For safety reasons, at least two people are required to install the server in the rack because of its weight and size.

(For the Japanese market, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)

● Never lift the server into the rack using the handles on the front panel.

● When connecting and disconnecting cables, observe the relevant instructions in the "Important Information" chapter of the technical manual for the corresponding rack. The technical manual is supplied with the corresponding rack.

● When installing the rack, make sure that the anti-tilt protection is correctly fitted.

● For safety reasons, no more than one unit may be removed from the rack at any one time during installation and maintenance work.

● If several units are simultaneously removed from the rack, there is a risk that the rack could tip over.

● The rack must be connected to the power supply by an authorized specialist (electrician).

● If the server is integrated into an installation that draws power from an industrial power supply network with an IEC309 type connector, the power supply's fuse protection must comply with the requirements for non-industrial power supply networks for the type A connector.

Page 39: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 39

Important information

3.2 CE conformity

3.3 FCC Class A Compliance Statement

If there is an FCC statement on the device, it applies to the products covered in this manual, unless otherwise specified herein. The statement for other products will appear in the accompanying documentation.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a "Class A" digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules and meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard ICES-003 for digital apparatus. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in strict accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no warranty that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

● Increase the separation between equipment and the receiver.

● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

The system complies with the requirements of the EC directives 2004/108/EC regarding "Electromagnetic Compatibility" and 2006/95/EC "Low Voltage Directive" and the directive of the European Parliament and Council 2011/65/EU. This is indicated by the CE marking (CE = Communauté Européenne).

Page 40: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

40 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Important information

Fujitsu is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Fujitsu. The correction of interferences caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.

The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC and ICES rules.

WARNING:

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

3.4 Environmental protection

Environmentally-friendly product design and development

This product has been designed in accordance with the Fujitsu standard for "environmentally friendly product design and development". This means that key factors such as durability, selection and labeling of materials, emissions, packaging, ease of dismantling and recycling have been taken into account.

This saves resources and thus reduces the harm done to the environment. Further information can be found at:

– http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html (for the global market)– http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/concept/ (for the Japanese

market)

Energy-saving information

Devices that do not need to be constantly switched on should be switched off until they are needed as well as during long breaks and after completion of work.

Packaging information

This packaging information doesn’t apply to the Japanese market.

Page 41: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 41

Important information

Do not throw away the packaging. You may need it later for transporting the system. If possible, the equipment should only be transported in its original packaging.

Information on handling consumables

Please dispose of printer consumables and batteries in accordance with the applicable national regulations.

In accordance with EU directives, batteries must not be disposed of with unsorted domestic waste. They can be returned free of charge to the manufacturer, dealer or an authorized agent for recycling or disposal.

All batteries containing pollutants are marked with a symbol (a crossed-out garbage can). They are also marked with the chemical symbol for the heavy metal that causes them to be categorized as containing pollutants:

Cd CadmiumHg MercuryPb Lead

Labels on plastic casing parts

Please avoid sticking your own labels on plastic parts wherever possible, since this makes it difficult to recycle them.

Returns, recycling and disposal

Please handle returns, recycling and disposal in accordance with local regulations.

Details regarding the return and recycling of devices and consumables within Europe can also be found in the "Returning used devices" manual, via your local Fujitsu branch or from our recycling center in Paderborn:

The device must not be disposed of with domestic waste. This device is labeled in compliance with European directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE).

This directive sets the framework for returning and recycling used equipment and is valid across the EU. When returning your used device, please use the return and collection systems available to you. Further information can be found at http://ts.fujitsu.com/recycling.

Page 42: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

42 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Important information

Fujitsu Technology SolutionsRecycling CenterD-33106 Paderborn

Tel. +49 5251 525 1410Fax +49 5251 525 32 1410

Page 43: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 43

4 Basic hardware procedures

4.1 Using diagnostics information

Use the Fujitsu ServerView Suite management software to plan the upgrade or replacement of hardware components. Please refer to the following ServerView Suite topics:

– Operation– Maintenance

It is recommended to prepare local maintenance tasks using remote diagnostics procedures, as described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual.

Please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner for details on the service concept and on how to order expansion kits or spare parts. Use the Fujitsu Illustrated Spares Catalog to identify the required spare part and obtain technical data and order information. Illustrated Spares catalogs are available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com/illustrated_spares (EMEA market only).

Perform the following diagnostics procedures to identify defective servers and components.

4.1.1 Locating the defective server

When working in a datacenter environment, switch on the ID indicator on the front and rear connector panels of the server for easy identification.

Ê Press the ID button on the front panel, use the iRMC web frontend or ServerView Operation Manager user interface to switch on the system identification LEDs.

I For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual and the "Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guide.

Ê When using ServerView Operations Manager to toggle the ID indicator, choose Single System View and press the Locate button.

Ê Remember to switch off the ID indicator after the maintenance task has been concluded successfully.

Page 44: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

44 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic hardware procedures

4.1.2 Determining the error class

The Local Service Concept (LSC) allows you to identify defective server components. Failure events are assigned to one of two error classes:

– Global Error events that need to be resolved by maintenance personnel

– Customer Self Service (CSS) error events that may be resolved by operating personnel

Global Error and CSS LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer replaceable unit or if maintenance personnel needs to be dispatched to replace the part.

I The indicators also light up in standby mode and after a server restart due to a power failure.

4.1.2.1 Global Error indicator

Ê Check the Global Error indicator on the front or connector panel of the server.

Ê For further diagnostics, proceed as follows:

– Hardware errors:

Check the System Event Log (SEL) as described in section "Viewing the SEL" on page 81.

– Software / agent related errors:

Check the ServerView System Monitor, available on Windows or Linux based servers with ServerView agents installed.

I For further information, please refer to the "ServerView System Monitor" user guide.

4.1.2.2 Customer Self Service (CSS) indicator

Ê Check the CSS indicator on the front panel or connector panel of the server .

Page 45: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 45

Basic hardware procedures

4.1.3 Locating the defective component

After determining the error class by the CSS or Global Error indicators (see section "Determining the error class" on page 44) local diagnostic indicators on the system board, HDD modules and power supply units allow you to identify the defective component (see section "Connectors and indicators" on page 333).

I For further information, refer to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual.

4.1.3.1 Local diagnostic indicators on the front

Ê Check the CSS indicator on the front and connector panels of the server:

I In addition to local diagnostic indicators, CSS or Global Error LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer or field replaceable unit (see section "Determining the error class" on page 44).

4.1.3.2 Local diagnostic indicators on the system board

Using the Indicate CSS button

Ê Shut down and power off the server.

Ê Disconnect the AC power cord(s) from the system.

I It is mandatory to disconnect power cords in order to use the Indicate CSS functionality.

Ê Press the Indicate CSS button to highlight defective components (see section "Connectors and indicators" on page 333).

I In addition to local diagnostic indicators, CSS or Global Error LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer replaceable unit or if a service technician needs to be dispatched to replace the part (see section "Determining the error class" on page 44).

If the system has been powered off to replace a non hot-plug unit, a system of PRIMERGY diagnostics indicators guides you to the faulty component.

Page 46: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

46 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic hardware procedures

4.2 Shutting down the server

V CAUTION!

For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

I This step is only required when upgrading or replacing non-hot plug components.

Ê Inform the system administrator that the server will be shut down and put offline.

Ê Terminate all applications.

Ê Perform the required procedures described in the preliminary steps of each upgrade or maintenance task.

Ê Shut down the server.

I If the system is running an ACPI-compliant operating system, pressing the On / Off button will perform a graceful shutdown.

Ê Switch on the ID indicator on the front and rear connector panels of the server as described in section "Locating the defective server" on page 43.

Page 47: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 47

Basic hardware procedures

4.3 Disconnecting the server from the mains

Figure 2: Unlocking the cable clamp of a power supply unit

Ê Press the cable clamp down until it disengages (1).

Ê Open the cable clamp (2).

Ê Pull all power cords out of the power outlets and remove them from the cable clamps.

4.4 Getting access to the component

V CAUTION!

● Before removing or installing covers, turn off the server and all peripheral devices. Also unplug all power cables from the outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock.

● In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the server must not run while the top cover is removed.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

Page 48: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

48 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic hardware procedures

4.4.1 Extending the server out of the rack

V CAUTION!

● Use the anti-tilt plate to prevent the rack from tipping when installing the rack. Pulling the server out of the rack without having installed the anti-tilt plate may cause the rack to tip over.

● Be careful not to pinch fingers or clothes when sliding out the server or pushing it back. Failure to do so may cause injury.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

Ê Remove all remaining external cables from the rear connector panel and expansion cards.

Ê If you are not using a cable mounting arm (CMA kit), ensure that the rear cables are long enough not to be strained or damaged when extending the server out of the rack.

Figure 3: Extending the server out of the rack

Ê Fold down the two quick release levers (1) and pull the server out of the rack until it locks in place (2).

V CAUTION!

Do not use the extended server as a surface on which to put things or as a work surface, and strictly avoid leaning on or against it.

Page 49: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 49

Basic hardware procedures

4.4.2 Removing the server from the rack

I In most cases maintenance tasks can be performed while the server is extended from the rack. However, depending on accessibility or security guidelines, it may make sense to completely remove the server from the rack cabinet for maintenance purposes.

V CAUTION!

At least two people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.(For the Japanese market, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)

Additionally, a lifter is required in the following cases:

– The server weighs more than 50 kg.– The server weighs more than 21 kg and is installed above the height

of 25 U.

When using a lifter, this removal procedure needs to be carried out by maintenance personnel.

For configurations below 32 kg:

At least two people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.

For configurations below 55 kg:

At least three people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.

For configurations above 55 kg:

At least four people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.

Page 50: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

50 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 4: Removing the server from the rack

Ê Release the locking bars on both telescopic rails (1).

Ê Lift the server out of the telescopic rails (2) and place it on an even surface.

Page 51: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 51

Basic hardware procedures

4.4.3 Removing the fan cover

You must remove the fan cover before removing the housing cover.

Figure 5: Removing the fan cover

Ê Push the two green buttons (1) in the direction of the arrow.

Ê Lift the fan cover upward and remove it (2).

4.4.4 Removing the housing cover

Figure 6: Removing the housing cover

Ê Push the housing cover as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow (1).

Ê Lift off the housing cover upward (2).

Page 52: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

52 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic hardware procedures

4.5 Reassembling

V CAUTION!

● Before attaching the covers, make sure no unnecessary parts or tools are left inside the server.

● In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the server must not run while the top / side cover is removed.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

4.5.1 Installing the housing cover

Figure 7: Installing the housing cover

Ê Position the housing cover so that it protrudes somewhat over the rear edge (1).

Make sure that each bolt is positioned in the corresponding nut.

Ê Push the housing cover as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow (2).

Page 53: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 53

Basic hardware procedures

4.5.2 Installing the fan cover

Figure 8: Inserting the fan cover in a slight angle

Ê Insert the fan cover in a slight angle.

Figure 9: Installing the fan cover

Ê Push the fan cover down (1).

Ê Push the edges of the fan cover down until the two green buttons engage (2).

I For a correct sliding the server into the rack, the height of the fan cover and the chassis top must be on the same level. If the fan cover is higher, push it down again until the level is equal.

Page 54: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

54 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic hardware procedures

4.5.3 Mounting the server in the rack

V CAUTION!

At least two people are needed to position the server on the rack rails. (For the Japanese market, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)

Additionally, a lifter is required in the following cases:

– The server weighs more than 50 kg.– The server weighs more than 21 kg and is to be installed above the

height of 25 U.

When using a lifter, this installation procedure needs to be carried out by maintenance personnel.

For configurations below 32 kg:

At least two people are needed to lift the server into the rack cabinet.

For configurations below 55 kg:

At least three people are needed to lift the server into the rack cabinet.

For configurations above 55 kg:

At least four people are needed to lift the server into the rack cabinet.

Page 55: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 55

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 10: Mounting the server onto the rack rails

Ê Fully extend the telescopic rails until they lock in place (1).

I The telescopic rails must click into place so that they can no longer be moved.

Ê At a slight angle, lower the server onto the rear mounting point on the telescopic rails (2).

Ê Fold down the server, while pressing the rail to the server side (3). Ensure that all six rack mounting bolts are properly seated in the mounting points on the telescopic rails and that the locking bars engage (4).

Page 56: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

56 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic hardware procedures

4.5.4 Sliding the server into the rack

Figure 11: Sliding the server into the rack

Ê Check if the height of the fan cover and the chassis top are on the same level If the fan cover is higher, push it down again until the level is equal.

Ê Release the locking mechanism of both rails (1).

Ê Push the server as far as it will go into the rack (2) until the quick-release levers engage (3).

V CAUTION!

Be careful with your fingers. You can pinch them when the quick-release levers change to the release position.

Ê Reconnect all cables except the power cord to the server rear.

Page 57: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 57

Basic hardware procedures

4.6 Connecting the server to the mains

V CAUTION!

The server supports a mains voltage in the ranges of 100 V - 240 V (Platinum) or 200 V - 240 V (Titanium). You may only operate the server if its rated voltage range corresponds to the local mains voltage.

Ê Connect all power cords to the power outlets.

I To provide true phase redundancy, the second power supply unit should be connected to a different AC power source from the other power supply unit. If one AC power source should fail, the server will still continue to run.

I After connecting the server to the mains it takes about 60 secondes until the server enters the standby mode.

Ê Ensure that the indicator on the power supply unit lights up green.

I For more information see section "Indicators on power supply units" on page 339.

Figure 12: Locking the cable clamp of a power supply unit

Ê Pull the cable clamp up (1).

Ê Thread the power cord through the cable clamp (2).

Ê Press the cable clamp down until it engages to secure the cable (3).

Page 58: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

58 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic hardware procedures

4.7 Switching on the server

V CAUTION!

● Before switching on the server, make sure the top cover is closed. In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the server must not run while the top cover is removed.

● After connecting all power cords, wait at least 60 seconds before pressing the On / Off button.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

I This step is only applicable to replace or expand non-hot plug components.

Ê Press the On / Off button to start up the server.

Ê Ensure that the power-on indicator above the On / Off button is lit green.

Ê Perform the required procedures described in the concluding steps of each upgrade or maintenance task.

4.8 Handling riser modules

Removing the riser module 1

Figure 13: Removing the riser module 1

Ê Carefully pull out the riser module 1 upward.

Page 59: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 59

Basic hardware procedures

Installing the riser module 1

Figure 14: Installing the riser module 1

Ê Insert the riser card into the system board slot.

Ê Press down the riser card module 1 using the green touch points.

Removing the riser module 2

Figure 15: Removing the riser module 2

Ê Carefully pull out the riser module 2 upward.

Page 60: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

60 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic hardware procedures

Installing the riser module 2

Figure 16: Installing the riser module 2

Ê Insert the two riser cards into the system board slots.

Ê Press down the riser card module 2 using the green touch points.

Ê If necessary, connect the cables to the other components.

Removing the riser module 3

Figure 17: Removing the riser module 3

Ê Carefully pull out the riser module 3 upward.

Page 61: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 61

Basic hardware procedures

Installing the riser module 3

Figure 18: Installing the riser module 3

Ê Insert the riser card into the system board slot and the two recesses (see close-up).

Ê Press down the riser card module 3 using the green touch points.

Ê If necessary, connect the cables to the other components.

Page 62: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

62 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic hardware procedures

4.9 Handling the air duct

Removing the air duct

Figure 19: Removing the air duct

Ê Carefully pull out the air duct upward.

Installing the air duct

Figure 20: Installing the air duct

Ê Install the air duct. Notice the hooks (see close-ups) and the guidings (see orange lines).

Page 63: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 63

5 Basic software procedures

5.1 Starting the maintenance task

5.1.1 Suspending BitLocker functionality

BitLocker Drive Encryption provides protection for operating system and data drives by encrypting the contents and requiring users to authenticate their credentials to access the information. In the scenario described here, BitLocker uses the compatible Trusted Platform Module (TPM) to detect if the computer's startup process has been modified from its original state.

I For additional information on how to use BitLocker on a computer without a compatible TPM, please refer to the "BitLocker Drive Encryption" documentation page at http://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc731549.aspx.

Suspending BitLocker Drive Encryption is a temporary method for removing BitLocker protection without decrypting the drive Windows is installed on. Suspend BitLocker before modifying the server’s hardware configuration or startup files. Resume BitLocker again after the maintenance procedure is complete.

V CAUTION!

– With BitLocker features enabled, modifying the system configuration (hardware or firmware settings) may render the system inaccessible. The system may enter Recovery Mode and require a 48-digits recovery password to return to normal operation.

Ensure to suspend BitLocker drive encryption before maintaining the server.

– When suspended, BitLocker uses a plain text key instead of the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) to read encrypted files. Keep in mind that information on this drive is not secure until BitLocker has been re-enabled.

Ê Ask the system administrator to suspend BitLocker-protection on the system volume, using the BitLocker Drive Encryption control panel item.

I This will temporarily disable BitLocker for maintenance purposes. The volume will not be decrypted and no keys will be discarded.

Page 64: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

64 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

For Windows Server 2008:

Ê Open BitLocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking BitLocker Drive Encryption.

Ê Select the system volume, and click Turn Off BitLocker.

Ê From the Turn Off BitLocker dialog box, click Disable BitLocker.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and above:

Ê Open BitLocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking Control Panel, clicking System and Security, and then clicking BitLocker Drive Encryption.

Ê Select the system volume, and click Suspend Protection.

Ê Click Yes to confirm that your data will not be protected while BitLocker is suspended.

I In order to determine which features are accessible through the BitLocker setup wizard, it may be necessary to modify the BitLocker Group Policy settings.

For further information on how to suspend BitLocker drive encryption, please refer to the Microsoft TechNet library at http://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc731549.aspx.

Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available in Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.

5.1.2 Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality

The ServerView Operations Manager boot watchdog determines whether the server boots within a preset time frame. If the watchdog timer expires, the system will automatically reboot.

5.1.2.1 Viewing boot watchdog settings

Viewing boot watchdog settings in the BIOS

Ê Enter the BIOS.

Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.

Page 65: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 65

Basic software procedures

Ê Under Boot Watchdog, you can obtain detailed information about the current watchdog status, time out intervals and actions that are triggered if watchdog time outs are exceeded.

I For detailed information on BIOS settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Viewing boot watchdog settings in the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê Select the Server Management menu.

Ê Under Watchdog Settings, you can obtain detailed information about the current watchdog status, time out intervals and actions that are triggered if watchdog time outs are exceeded.

I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guide.

Viewing boot watchdog settings in ServerView Operations Manager

Ê In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select Maintenance from the Information / Operation menu.

Ê Under ASR&R select the Watchdog tab to obtain detailed information about the current watchdog status, time out intervals and actions that are triggered if watchdog time outs are exceeded.

I For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations Manager - Server Management" user guide.

5.1.2.2 Configuring boot watchdog settings

If the system is to be started from removable boot media for firmware upgrade purposes, the Boot watchdog needs to be disabled before starting maintenance task. Otherwise, the Boot watchdog might initiate a system reboot before the flash process is complete.

V CAUTION!

An incomplete firmware upgrade process may render the server inaccessible or result in damaged / destroyed hardware.

Timer settings can be configured in the BIOS or using the ServerView iRMC web frontend:

Page 66: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

66 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

Configuring boot watchdog settings in the BIOS

Ê Enter the BIOS.

Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.

Ê Under Boot Watchdog set the Action setting to Continue.

Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Configuring boot watchdog settings using the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê Select the Server Management menu.

Ê Under Watchdog Settings select Continue from the Boot Watchdog drop down list.

Ê Click Apply for the changes to take effect.

I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guide.

5.1.3 Removing backup and optical disk media

Ê Ask the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.

Ê If the backup media cannot be ejected by conventional means, and it is mandatory that the cartridge be removed prior to returning the drive for repair or disposing it, a manual tape extraction needs to be performed.

For further information on "forcible" tape ejection, please refer to the "Tape Facts" guide available to Fujitsu service partners from the following https address:

https://partners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/Pages/TapeFacts.aspx

For the Japanese market, please contact Fujitsu support, if "forcible" tape ejection is necessary.

Page 67: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 67

Basic software procedures

I Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage to the tape drive, the data cartridge / tape or for the loss of any data resulting from manual tape extraction procedures.

5.1.4 Verifying and configuring the backup software solution

I This task only applies to the Japanese market.

Depending on the backup software solution, it may be necessary to disable or delete the backup drive from the backup software drive list before starting the maintenance task.

This is the case for the following backup software solution:

– BackupExec

I Procedures may differ depending on the backup software. For details, refer to the dedicated documentation provided separately.

Further information on suitable backup software solutions and related documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the Fujitsu Extranet pages.

5.1.5 Note on server maintenance in a Multipath I/O environment

When booting your server offline from the ServerView Suite DVD to perform an offline BIOS / firmware update using the ServerView Update DVD or collect diagnostic data using PrimeCollect in a Multipath I/O environment, there is a risk of damaging the system configuration which may leave the system unable to boot.

I This is a known restriction of Windows PE with Multipath drivers.

Using Update Manager Express

Ê If performing an offline BIOS / firmware update, first of all prepare the ServerView Update DVD or USB stick:

Ê Download the latest ServerView Update DVD image from Fujitsu:

Page 68: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

68 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

for the EMEA marketftp://ftp.ts.fujitsu.com/images/serverview

for the Japanese market: http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/products/note/svsdvd/dvd/

Ê Burn the image to a DVD.

Ê In order to create a bootable USB stick, please proceed as described in the "Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide.

Ê Before using the ServerView Update DVD or USB stick in an offline environment, properly shut down the server and disconnect all external I/O connections (like LAN, FC or SAS cables) from the system. Only keep mouse, keyboard, video cable and AC power cord connected.

I Ensure that all external I/O connections are uniquely identified so that you can reconnect them into their original locations after concluding the task.

To start Update Manager Express from the (physical) Update DVD or from a USB stick, proceed as follows:

Ê Prepare your Update DVD or USB stick as described in the "Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide.

Ê Boot the server from the prepared Update DVD or USB stick:

DVD: Ê Switch on the server.

Ê Right after switching on the server, insert the Update DVD into the DVD drive and close the tray.

USB: Ê Connect the USB stick to the server.

Ê Switch on the server.

If the server does not boot from DVD or USB stick, proceed as follows:

Ê Reboot the server, e.g. by pressing the reset button on the front or switching the server off and then on again after a few seconds.

Ê Once the server has been started, press [F12] to enter the boot menu.

Ê Use the Ê and Ë cursor keys to select your DVD drive or USB stick as boot device and press [ENTER].

The server will now boot from the Update DVD or USB stick.

Ê After the boot process is complete, select your preferred GUI language.

Page 69: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 69

Basic software procedures

The Update Manager Express main window will be displayed.

Ê Finish the intended maintenance task.

I For further information, refer to the "Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide.

Using PrimeCollect

To start PrimeCollect, proceed as follows:

Ê Before using PrimeCollect in an offline environment, properly shut down the server and disconnect all external I/O connections (like LAN, FC or SAS cables) from the system. Only keep mouse, keyboard, video cable and AC power cord connected.

I Ensure that all external I/O connections are uniquely identified so that you can reconnect them into their original locations after concluding the task.

Ê Switch on the server.

Ê Right after switching on the server, insert the ServerView Suite DVD into the DVD drive and close the drive tray.

If the server does not boot from DVD, proceed as follows:

Ê Reboot the server, e.g. by pressing the reset button on the front or switching the server off and then on again after a few seconds.

Ê Once the server has been started, press [F12] to enter the boot menu.

Ê Use the Ê and Ë cursor keys to select your DVD drive as boot device and press [ENTER].

The server will now boot from the ServerView Suite DVD.

Ê After the boot process is complete, select your preferred GUI language.

Ê In the initial Installation Manager startup window, choose PrimeCollect from the Installation Manager mode section.

Ê Click Continue to proceed.

Ê Finish the intended maintenance task.

I For further information, refer to the "PrimeCollect" user guide.

Page 70: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

70 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

Concluding the procedure

Ê After the update or diagnostic procedure has been completed, shut down the server, reconnect all external I/O connections and bring the system back to normal operation.

Ê If necessary, perform this procedure for all remaining servers within the Multipath environment.

5.1.6 Switching on the ID indicator

When working in a datacenter environment, switch on the ID indicator on the front and rear connector panels of the server for easy identification.

I For further information, refer to section "Locating the defective server" on page 43 or to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" and "Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guides.

Using the ID button on the front panel

Ê Press the ID button on the front panel to switch on the system identification LEDs.

I For further information, refer to section "Connectors and indicators" on page 333.

Using the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê Under System Overview, click Identify LED On to switch on the ID indicators.

Using ServerView Operations Manager

Ê In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View press the Locate button in the title bar to switch on the ID indicators.

Page 71: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 71

Basic software procedures

5.2 Completing the maintenance task

5.2.1 Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC

I For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.

After replacing the system board, memory or a CPU, it is essential to upgrade the BIOS and iRMC to the latest version. The latest BIOS and iRMC versions are available from the Fujitsu support internet pages at:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/ (EMEA market)http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/ (Japanese market)

I Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage done to the server or for the loss of any data resulting from BIOS updates.

5.2.1.1 Updating or recovering the system board BIOS

BIOS flash procedure

Ê Perform the BIOS flash procedure as described in your server’s "BIOS Setup Utility" reference manual.

BIOS recovery procedure

Ê Perform the BIOS recovery procedure as described in your server’s "BIOS Setup Utility" reference manual.

5.2.1.2 Updating or recovering the iRMC

iRMC flash procedure

Ê Prepare a USB stick including the bootable iRMC firmware update image.

Ê Connect the USB stick to the USB port.

I Ensure that only the USB device with the iRMC firmware is connected to the USB port. Remove all other USB devices temporarily.

Ê Restart the server.

Ê The system will detect the USB stick.

Page 72: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

72 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

I If the BIOS cannot identify the USB stick, the pop-up message Failed to boot for Emergency flash. Please Reset now. will show up in the center of the screen.

Ê Choose one of the following options from the update tool menu to start the iRMC update process:

NormalChoose this option to update an existing system board.

Initial Choose this option if the system board has been replaced prior to the iRMC update procedure. This option will perform all relevant flash procedures in a row, including the iRMC firmware and bootloader.

V CAUTION!

Do not interrupt the iRMC upgrade process after it has started. If the process is interrupted, the iRMC BIOS may be permanently corrupted.

I If the iRMC does not work after flashing, disconnect the system from the mains and reconnect it again.

Ê After completion of the flash process, remove the USB stick and restart the server.

iRMC recovery procedure

Ê Prepare a USB stick including the bootable iRMC firmware update image.

Ê Ensure that the server has been shut down and disconnected from the mains as described in section "Shutting down the server" on page 46.

Ê Connect the USB stick to the USB port.

I Ensure that only the USB device with the iRMC firmware is connected to the USB port. Remove all other USB devices temporarily.

Ê Connect the server to the mains while pushing the ID button on the front panel. Ask a second person to help you if necessary.

Ê Ensure that the Global Error indicator and the ID indicator are flashing to indicate that the server is entering the iRMC recovery state.

Ê Press the Power On / Off button. The system starts the POST process.

I In iRMC recovery mode, the “FUJITSU” logo does not show up.

Page 73: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 73

Basic software procedures

Ê The system will detect the USB stick.

I If the BIOS cannot identify the USB stick, the pop-up message Failed to boot for Emergency flash. Please Reset now. will show up in the center of the screen.

Ê Choose the Recovery_L option from the update tool menu to start the iRMC update process.

V CAUTION!

Do not interrupt the iRMC upgrade process after it has started. If the process is interrupted, the iRMC BIOS may be permanently corrupted.

I If the iRMC does not work after flashing, disconnect the system from the mains and reconnect it again.

Ê Shut down the server by pressing the power On / Off button.

Ê Disconnect the server from the mains to exit the iRMC recovery state.

5.2.2 Verifying system information backup / restore

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored from the Chassis ID board to the new system board.

In order to verify whether the backup or restore process has been successful, check the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView Operations Manager (see also section "Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)" on page 81).

After replacing the system board

Ê Check the SEL log files as described in section "Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)" on page 81 to verify whether the backup data on the Chassis ID EPROM has been restored to the system board:Chassis IDPROM: BMC FW Restore successful

Page 74: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

74 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

After replacing the Chassis ID EPROM

I In case of the PRIMERGY RX200 S8 server, the Chassis ID EPROM is integrated on the front panel board.

Ê Check the SEL log files as described in section "Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)" on page 81 to verify whether a backup copy of the system board settings has been transferred to the Chassis ID EPROM:Chassis IDPROM: BMC FW Backup successful

5.2.3 Updating RAID controller firmware

After replacing the RAID controller, it is essential to upgrade the firmware to the latest version. The latest RAID controller firmware version is available from the Fujitsu support web pages at:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/ (EMEA market)http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/ (Japanese market)

I Fujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage done to the server or for the loss of any data resulting from firmware updates.For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.

Using the ServerView Update Manager

For a detailed description on how to update the RAID controller firmware using the ServerView Update Manager or Update Manager Express (UME), please refer to the following manuals:

– ServerView Update Manager:"ServerView Update Management" user guide

– ServerView Update Manager Express:"Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide

Using the flash tool

The latest firmware files are available as ASPs (Autonomous Support Packages) for Windows or as DOS tools from the Fujitsu support web pages at:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/ (EMEA market)http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/downloads/ (Japanese market)

Ê Select Drivers & Downloads.

Page 75: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 75

Basic software procedures

Ê From the Select Product drop down lists, choose your PRIMERGY server or enter its serial or ident number into the search field.

Ê Select your operating system and version.

Ê Select the desired component type (e.g. SAS RAID).

Ê Select your controller from the device list to expand a compilation of available drivers and firmware.

Ê Select the desired file and click Download for further instructions.

5.2.4 Enabling Option ROM scan

In order to configure an expansion card that has been installed or replaced, the card’s Option ROM has to be enabled in the system board BIOS. The card’s firmware is called by the system BIOS upon reboot and can be entered and configured.

Option ROM can be enabled permanently (e.g. in case of a boot controller that may require frequent setup) or temporarily for one-time configuration. When permanently enabling a controllers’s Option ROM, keep in mind that only two Option ROMs can be activated in the system board BIOS at a time.

Ê Enter the BIOS.

Ê From the Advanced menu select Option ROM Configuration.

Ê Identify the desired PCI slot and set its Launch Slot # OpROM setting to Enabled.

Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I Up to two Option ROMs can be activated in the system board BIOS at a time.For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

When the enabled expansion card is initialized during the POST phase of the boot sequence, a key combination is displayed temporarily to enter the expansion card’s firmware.

Ê Press the displayed key combination.

Ê Modify the expansion card firmware options as desired.

Ê Save your changes and exit the firmware.

Page 76: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

76 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

I The expansion card’s option ROM can now be disabled in the system board BIOS.

Exception: If the expansion card controls a permanent boot device, the card’s Option ROM has to remain enabled.

5.2.5 Verifying and configuring the backup software solution

I This task only applies to the Japanese market.

Disabling backup drives

Depending on the backup software solution, it may be necessary to disable or delete the backup drive from the backup software drive list and reconfigure backup jobs after completing the maintenance task.

This is the case for the following backup software solutions:

– Netvault for Windows– ARCServe– BackupExec

I Procedures may differ depending on the backup software. For details, refer to the dedicated documentation provided separately.

Further information on suitable backup software solutions and related documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the Fujitsu Extranet pages.

Re-enabling backup drives

If a backup drive has been disabled or deleted from the backup software drive list as described in section 5.1.4 on page 67, it has to be re-enabled to complete the maintenance task.

Ê Re-enable backup drives and revise backup software settings and cronjobs.

I Detailed information on suitable backup software solutions and related documentation is available to Fujitsu service partners from the Fujitsu Extranet pages

Page 77: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 77

Basic software procedures

5.2.6 Resetting the boot retry counter

The boot retry counter is decremented from its preset value every time the POST watchdog initiates a system reboot. When the value has reached ’0’, the system will shut down and power off.

5.2.6.1 Viewing the boot retry counter

The current boot retry counter status is available in the BIOS:

Ê Enter the BIOS.

Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.

Ê Under Boot Retry Counter the current number of remaining boot attempts is displayed. The value is further decremented with every failed boot attempt or system reboot resulting from critical system errors.

Ê Exit the BIOS.

5.2.6.2 Resetting the boot retry counter

The boot retry counter should be reset to its original value concluding every service task.

I Please note, if the customer does not know about the original boot retry values:

If the system boots up and no further errors occur within 6 hours after that successful boot attempt, the boot retry counter will automatically be reset to its default value. Please take into account, that the specified number of boot attempts can only be determined after this period of time.

If the customer knows about the original boot retry values, proceed as follows to reset or configure the boot retry counter:

Resetting the boot retry counter in the BIOS

Ê Enter the BIOS.

Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.

Ê Under Boot Retry Counter press the [+] or [-]keys to specify the maximum number of boot attempts (0 to 7).

Ê Exit the BIOS.

Page 78: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

78 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

Resetting the boot retry counter using the ServerView Operations Manager

Ê In the ServerView Operations Manager Administration view, select Server Configuration.

Ê If more than one server is managed in SVOM, select the target server and click Next.

Ê From the Server Configuration menu pane, choose Restart Options.

Ê Under Reboot Retries, specify the maximum number of boot attempts (0 to 7) in the Default for reboot tries field.

Resetting the boot retry counter using iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê Select the Server Management menu.

Ê The following boot retry counter settings are available under ASR&R Options:

Ê Under Retry counter max specify the maximum number of attempts to boot the operating system (0 to 7).

Ê Under Retry counter the current number of remaining boot attempts is displayed. Overwrite this value with the maximum number of boot attempts specified above in order to reset the boot retry counter.

Ê Click Apply for the changes to take effect.

I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guide.

5.2.7 Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality

If ServerView Operations Manager boot watchdog functionality has been disabled for firmware upgrade purposes (see section 5.1.2 on page 64), it has to be re-enabled to complete the maintenance task.

Timer settings can be configured in the BIOS or using the ServerView iRMC web frontend:

Configuring boot watchdog settings in the BIOS

Ê Enter the BIOS.

Page 79: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 79

Basic software procedures

Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.

Ê Under Boot Watchdog set the Action setting to Reset.

Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Configuring boot watchdog settings using the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê Select the Server Management menu.

Ê Under Watchdog Settings ensure that the check box next to Boot Watchdog is selected. From the drop down list choose Reset and specify the desired timeout delay.

Ê Click Apply for the changes to take effect.

I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guide.

5.2.8 Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS

When a processor, an expansion card, or a memory module fails, the defective component will be set to Disabled or Failed in the system BIOS. The server will then reboot with only the intact hardware components remaining in the system configuration. After replacing the defective component, it needs to be re-enabled in the system board BIOS.

Ê Enter the BIOS.

Ê Select the Advanced menu.

Ê Select the status menu of the desired component:

– Processors: CPU Status

I This option is only available for multi-processor systems.

– Memory: Memory Status

– Expansion cards: PCI Status

Ê Reset replaced components to Enable.

Page 80: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

80 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

5.2.9 Verifying the memory mode

If a memory module fails, the server will reboot and the defective module will be disabled. As a result, the current operation mode (e.g. Mirrored Channel mode) may no longer be available due to a lack of identical memory module pairs. In this case, the operation mode will automatically revert to Independent Channel Mode.

I For detailed information on memory operation modes available for your server, refer to section "Memory sequence" on page 200.

After replacing the defective module(s) the memory operation mode is automatically reset to its original state. It is recommended to verify that the operation mode has been correctly.

Ê Enter the BIOS.

Ê Select the Advanced menu.

Ê Under Memory Status verify that none of the memory modules are marked as Failed.

Ê Save your changes (if applicable) and exit the BIOS.

I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

5.2.10 Verifying the system time settings

I This task only applies to Linux environments.

After the system board has been replaced, the system time is set automatically. By default, the RTC (Real Time Clock) time standard is set as the local time.

If a Linux OS is used and the hardware clock has been configured as UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated) in the operating system, the BMC local time may not be mapped correctly.

Page 81: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 81

Basic software procedures

Ê After replacing the system board, ask the system administrator whether the RTC or UTC time standard is to be used as system time.

I If the system time (RTC) is set to UTC, the SEL (System Event Log) time stamps may differ from the local time.

Ê Enter the BIOS.

Ê Select the Main menu.

Ê Under System Time and System Date specify the correct time and date.

I By default, the system time set in the BIOS is RTC (Real Time Clock) local time. If your IT infrastructure relies on universally accepted time standards, set the System Time to UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated) instead. Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) can be considered equivalent to UTC.

Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual

5.2.11 Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)

5.2.11.1 Viewing the SEL

You can view the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView Operations Manager or the ServerView iRMC web frontend:

Viewing the SEL in ServerView Operations Manager

Ê In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select Maintenance from the Information / Operation menu.

Ê Under Maintenance select System Event Log.

Ê Select the message type(s) you want to display:

– Critical events– Major events– Minor events– Informational events

I Note on the SVOM Driver Monitor

Page 82: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

82 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

The Driver Monitor view gives you an overview of the monitored components as well as the associated events contained in the system event log on the managed server.

Under Monitored Components the monitored components are listed. If a component has the status Warning or Error, you can select it in the list and click Acknowledge. This confirms the event on the server side. You may have to log on to the server beforehand. The status of the component will then be reset to ok. To see the new status you must refresh the Driver Monitor view with Refresh.

I For detailed information on how to view and sort the SEL using ServerView Operations Manager, refer to the "ServerView Operations Manager - Server Management" user guide.

Viewing the SEL using the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê Select the Event Log and choose the Internal Event Log submenu.

Ê Under Internal Event Log Content the SEL is being displayed. In order to filter the list, select the check boxes next to the desired event types and press Apply for the changes to take effect.

I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guide.

5.2.11.2 Clearing the SEL

You can clear the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView iRMC web frontend:

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê Select the Event Log and choose the Internal Event Log submenu.

Ê Under Internal Event Log Information click Clear Internal Event Log to clear the SEL.

I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guide.

Page 83: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 83

Basic software procedures

5.2.12 Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment

In order to prevent errors caused by changing network device names (eth<x>), it is recommended to store the MAC address (hardware address) of a network interface card in the related NIC configuration file of the Linux OS.

When replacing a network controller or the system board with onboard LAN controllers in a server running Linux OS, the MAC address will change but not automatically be updated in the definition file.

In order to prevent communication problems, it is necessary to update the changed MAC address stored in the related ifcfg-eth<x> definition file.

To update the MAC address, proceed as follows:

I Procedures may differ depending on your Linux OS or the definition file on the client system. Use the following information as reference. Ask the system administrator to change the definition file.

Ê After replacing a network controller or the system board, switch on and boot the server as described in section "Switching on the server" on page 58.

kudzu, the hardware configuration tool for Red Hat Linux, will launch at boot and detect the new and / or changed hardware on your system.

I kudzu may not launch at boot depending on the client’s environment.

Ê Select Keep Configuration and Ignore to complete the boot process.

Ê Use the vi text editor to specify the MAC address in the HWADDR section of the ifcfg-eth<x> file:

I The MAC address can be found on the type label attached to the system board or network controller.

Example:

In order to modify the definition file for network controller 1, enter the following command:

# vi /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth1

In vi, specify the new MAC address as follows:

HWADDR=xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

Page 84: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

84 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

Ê Save and close the definition file.

Ê For the changes to take effect, you need to reboot the network by entering the following command:

# service network restart

I If the system board or network controller offers multiple LAN ports, it is necessary to update the remaining ifcfg-eth<x> definition files accordingly.

Ê Update the NIC configuration file to reflect the new card sequence and MAC address.

5.2.13 Resuming BitLocker functionality

If BitLocker Drive Encryption has been suspended for maintenance purposes (see section "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63), it has to be re-enabled to complete the service task.

I If BitLocker Drive Encryption has been suspended prior to replacing components you won't be asked for a recovery key when rebooting the server after the maintenance task. However, if BitLocker functionality has not been suspended, Windows will enter recovery mode and ask you to input recovery key for further booting.

Ê In this case, ask the system administrator to enter the recovery key in order to boot the operating system.

Ê Ask the system administrator to enable the previously suspended BitLocker-protection on the system volume, using the BitLocker Drive Encryption control panel item:

For Windows Server 2008:

Ê Open BitLocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking BitLocker Drive Encryption.

Ê Select the system volume, and click Turn On BitLocker.

Page 85: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 85

Basic software procedures

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and above:

Ê Open BitLocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking Control Panel, clicking System and Security, and then clicking BitLocker Drive Encryption.

Ê Select the system volume, and click Resume Protection.

I For further information on how to resume BitLocker drive encryption, please refer to the Microsoft TechNet library at http://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc731549.aspx.

Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available in Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.

5.2.14 Performing a RAID array rebuild

After replacing a hard disk drive that has been combined into a RAID array, RAID rebuild will be performed completely unattended as a background process.

Ê Ensure that the RAID array rebuild has started normally. Wait until the progress bar has reached at least one percent.

Ê Inform the customer about the remaining rebuild time, based on the displayed duration estimate.

Figure 21: Progress bar (RAID array rebuild)

V CAUTION!

The system is now operational, however, data redundancy will not be available until the RAID array rebuild is complete. Depending on the hard disk drive capacity the overall process can take up to several hours, in some cases even days.

I You may notice a slight performance impact during rebuild.

Page 86: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

86 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

5.2.15 Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses

When replacing a network controller, the MAC (Media Access Control) and WWN (World Wide Name) addresses will change.

I In addition to the procedures described below, MAC / WWN addresses can also be found on the type label attached to a network controller or system board.

5.2.15.1 Looking up MAC addresses

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê Select the System Information menu.

Ê Under Network Inventory, you will find detailed information on each network controller in the managed PRIMERGY server, including its MAC address.

I This information is only available with the iRMC S4 or above.

Only network controllers supporting the Command Line Protocol (CLP) will be displayed.

Ê Inform the customer about the changed MAC address.

5.2.15.2 Looking up WWN addresses

Emulex FC / FCoE adapters

Ê Enable the network controller’s Option ROM in the system board BIOS as described in section "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 75.

Ê Restart the server.

Ê During boot, as soon as the Emulex BIOS utility option appears, press [ALT]+[E] or [CTRL]+[E].

Ê Under Emulex Adapters in the System you will find all available Emulex adapters and their WWN addresses.

Ê Note down the new 16-digit WWN address.

Ê Press [Esc] to exit the Emulex BIOS utility.

Ê Inform the customer about the changed WWN address.

Page 87: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 87

Basic software procedures

QLogic FC adapters

Ê Enable the network controller’s Option ROM in the system board BIOS as described in section "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 75.

Ê Restart the server.

Ê During boot, as soon as the QLogic BIOS utility option appears, press [ALT]+[Q] or [CTRL]+[Q].

Ê Under Select Host Adapter use the arrow keys æ/Ë to select the desired FC / FCoE adapter and press [Enter].

Ê From the Fast!UTIL Options menu, select Configuration Settings, and press [Enter].

Ê From the Configuration Settings menu, select Adapter Settings, and press [Enter].

Ê Note down the new 16-digit WWN address found under Adapter Port Name.

Ê Press [Esc] to return to the main menu and exit the QLogic BIOS utility.

Ê Inform the customer about the changed WWN address.

5.2.16 Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool

The Chassis ID EPROM located on a dedicated Chassis ID board or on your server’s front panel board contains system information like server name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.

In order to integrate your system into the ServerView management environment and to enable server installation using the ServerView Installation Manager, system data needs to be complete and correct.

After replacing the Chassis ID EPROM, system information has to be entered using the Chassis ID Prom tool. The tool and further instructions are available to maintenance personnel from the Fujitsu Technology Solutions Extranet:

https://partners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/

Ê Select your PRIMERGY system from the main area of the page.

Ê From the categories selection, choose Software & Tools Documentation.

Ê In the Tools area click Tools: Chassis-IDProm Tool to download the file (tool-chassis-Idprom-Tool.zip).

Page 88: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

88 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

I For the Japanese market, follow the instructions provided separately.

Note on Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design (ATD)

I If the Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design (ATD) option is available and has been enabled for your server, please set information within the Chassis ID Prom Tool accordingly.

V CAUTION!

Please note that you can only set the ATD flag. Resetting the ATD flag using the Chassis ID Prom Tool is not possible!

5.2.17 Configuring LAN teaming

Use ServerView Operations Manager to obtain detailed information on existing LAN teams:

Ê In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select System Status from the Information / Operation menu.

Ê Under Network Interfaces select LAN Teaming.

Ê The Network Interfaces (Summary) overview shows all configured LAN teams and their components. Choose a LAN team to display further details:

– LAN Team Properties: Properties of the selected LAN team– LAN Team Statistics: Available statistics about the selected LAN team

I For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations Manager - Server Management" user guide.

5.2.17.1 After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers

Please note when re-using a replaced LAN controller:

The ATD option can only be ordered from the manufacturer as a factory preset. To find out if your server is ATD-enabled, check for the ATD logo on the identification rating plate.

For further information on Cool-safe® Advanced Thermal Design (ATD), please refer to your server’s operating manual.

Page 89: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 89

Basic software procedures

Ê Confirm with the customer whether the LAN controller you have replaced has been used as part of a LAN teaming configuration.

Ê If LAN teaming has been active, you will need to restore the configuration using the LAN driver utility after replacing the LAN controller.

Ensure that the controllers have been assigned as primary or secondary according to your requirements.

I For details, refer to the relevant LAN driver manual.

5.2.17.2 After replacing the system board

Ê Confirm with the customer whether the onboard LAN controller you have replaced has been used as part of a LAN teaming configuration.

Ê If LAN teaming has been active, you will need to restore the configuration using the LAN driver utility after replacing the system board.

I For details, refer to the relevant LAN driver manual.

5.2.18 Switching off the ID indicator

Press the ID button on the front panel, or use the iRMC web frontend or ServerView Operations Manager to switch off the ID indicator after the maintenance task has been concluded successfully.

I For further information, refer to section "Locating the defective server" on page 43 or to the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" and "Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guides.

Using the ID button on the front panel

Ê Press the ID button on the front panel to switch off the ID indicators.

Using the iRMC web frontend

Ê Enter the ServerView iRMC web frontend.

Ê Under System Overview, click Identify LED Off to switch off the ID indicators.

Page 90: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

90 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

Using ServerView Operations Manager

Ê In ServerView Operations Manager Single System View and press the Locate button in the title bar to switch off the ID indicator.

5.2.19 Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan

After replacing a defective system fan or power supply unit containing a defective fan, the fan error indicators will stay lit until the next fan test. By default, a fan test is automatically started every 24 hours. The first automatic fan test being performed after replacing a fan will turn off the fan error indicator.If you want to start the fan test manually, you can do so by following the description below:

Executing the fan test via the iRMC Web interface

Ê Log into the iRMC web interface.

Ê Under Sensors select Fans.

Ê Select the replaced fan in the system fans group and click Start Fan Test.

I For detailed information on iRMC settings, refer to the "Integrated Remote Management Controller" user guide.

Executing the fan test via ServerView Operations Manager

Ê Open the ServerView Operations Manager and log in.

Ê Under Administration select Server Configuration.

Ê In the hierarchy tree of the Server list tab, select the server to be configured.

Ê In the right-hand side of the window, specify the details on the selected server and confirm your entries by clicking GO....

In the left-hand section of the window, the Configuration tab is being activated.

Ê In the navigation area of the Configuration tab, select Other Settings.

Ê Under Daily Fan Test, set the daily fan test time to a few minutes from the current time. (Ensure to note down your previous setting.)

Ê Click Save Page.The fan test will be started at the specified time.

Page 91: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 91

Basic software procedures

Ê After the fan test is complete, restore the time setting to its initial value and click Save Page.

I For more detailed information, refer to the "ServerView Operations Manager" user guide.

For the Japanese market: Executing the fan test via Chassis ID Prom Tool

I Please follow the instructions provided separately.

Page 92: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

92 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Basic software procedures

Page 93: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 93

6 Power supply

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

● Do not disassemble the power supply unit. Doing so may cause electric shock.

● Areas around the power supply unit may remain extremely hot after shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to cool down before removing the power supply unit.

● When installing the power supply unit, be sure to confirm that the connector of the power supply unit is not damaged or bent.

● Do not insert your hands in the power supply unit slot when removing the power supply unit. Doing so may cause electric shock.

● If the power supply unit is hard to remove, do not pull out it by force.

● The power supply unit is heavy, so handle it carefully. If you drop it by mistake, injuries may result.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

Page 94: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

94 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Power supply

6.1 Basic information

In its basic configuration the server is equipped with a hot-plug power supply unit (450 W or 800 W), that adjusts automatically to any mains voltage in a range of 100 V - 240 V (Platinum) or 200 V - 240 V (Titanium). As an option, the power supply can be expanded with an extra power supply unit to create a redundant power supply. If a power supply unit fails, the redundant configuration assures continued operation. The defective power supply unit can be replaced during operation (hot-plug).

There are three types of power supply units available:

I Both power supply units must be of the same type.

A PSU module 450 W S26113-E575-V52 / A3C40161429

BPSU module 800 W ("Platinum" model)

S26113-E574-V52 / A3C40161428

CPSU module 800 W ("Titanium" model)

S26113-E615-V50 / A3C40169522

Page 95: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 95

Power supply

6.2 Installing a power supply unit

6.2.1 Preliminary steps

No steps needed.

6.2.2 Removing the dummy cover

Figure 22: Removing the dummy cover

Ê Press the two grips together as indicated by the arrows (1) and remove the dummy cover (2).

V CAUTION!

Keep the dummy cover for future use. If the power supply unit is removed and not replaced with a new one, the dummy cover must be reinstalled due to cooling, to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on electromagnetic compatibility), and to protect against fire.

Customer Replaceable Unit(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 96: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

96 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Power supply

6.2.3 Installing the power supply unit

Figure 23: Unlocking the power supply unit

Ê Push the handle of the power supply unit halfway upward in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 24: Installing the power supply unit

Ê Carefully push the power supply unit into the empty bay (1) until it stops.

Ê Push the handle of the power supply unit as far as it will go in the direction of the arrow (2).

I Make sure that the power supply unit engages correctly in the bay and is locked in position. This is the only way to prevent the power supply unit from sliding out of its bay and being damaged during transportation.

Page 97: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 97

Power supply

Figure 25: Installing the cable clamp

Ê Push the cable clamp into the corresponding hole until it clicks in.

6.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Page 98: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

98 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Power supply

6.3 Removing a power supply unit

Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)

Regarding of removing power supply units, additional tasks are needed, due to an interference between CMA stopper and the power supply units.

Figure 26: Unlocking the CMA stopper

Ê Push the lock spring inward to unlock the CMA stopper.

Customer Replaceable Unit(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 99: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 99

Power supply

Figure 27: Removing the CMA stopper

Ê Remove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar.

Ê Hold the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA including cables in the right hand.

Figure 28: Removing the power supply unit

Ê Remove the power supply unit and install the dummy cover carefully.

Ê Mount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA) again into the rail.

Page 100: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

100 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Power supply

6.3.1 Preliminary steps

No steps needed.

6.3.2 Removing a power supply unit

Ê Remove the power cord from the dedicated power supply unit as described in section "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47.

I Keep the power cord for future use.

Figure 29: Unlocking and removing the power supply unit

Ê Push the handle of the power supply unit halfway upward in the direction of the arrow (1).

Ê Push the lock in direction of the arrow (2).

Ê Grip the handle and pull out the power supply unit in the direction of the arrow (3).

V CAUTION!

Never leave the bay for the power supply unit empty for more than two minutes during operation. Otherwise, excessive temperatures could damage system components.

Page 101: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 101

Power supply

6.3.3 Installing the dummy cover

Figure 30: Installing the dummy cover

Ê Push the dummy cover into the right bay until it clicks into place.

Ensure that the marking "TOP" is right and the upper rear cant of the dummy cover fits under the PSU cage.

6.3.4 Concluding steps

No steps needed.

6.4 Replacing a power supply unit

V CAUTION!

● When replacing a power supply unit in a non-redundant PSU configuration, the server must be switched off first.

Customer Replaceable Unit(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 102: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

102 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Power supply

● Replace the power supply unit after specifying the one that breaks down at work by revitalization.

● Both power supply units must be of the same type.

Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)

Regarding of replacing power supply units, additional tasks are needed, due to an interference between CMA stopper and the power supply units.

Ê Push the lock spring inward to unlock the CMA stopper (see figure 26).

Ê Remove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar (see figure 27).

Ê Hold the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA arm including cables in the right hand.

Ê Remove the power supply unit (see figure 28) and install the new power supply unit carefully.

Ê Mount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA arm) again into the rail.

6.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê Check which power supply unit is defective.

A power supply unit is defective when the indicator on the power supply unit lights up orange (see section "Indicators on power supply units" on page 339)

Ê Only when replacing a power supply unit in a non-redundant configuration: "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê Remove the power cord from the defective power supply unit as described in section "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47.

6.4.2 Removing the defective power supply unit

Ê Remove the power supply unit as described in section "Removing a power supply unit" on page 100.

Page 103: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 103

Power supply

6.4.3 Installing the new power supply unit

Ê Install the power supply unit as described in section "Installing the power supply unit" on page 96.

6.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê Only when replacing a power supply unit in a non-redundant configuration: "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan" on page 90

6.5 Replacing the power distribution board

6.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Page 104: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

104 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Power supply

6.5.2 Removing the defective power distribution board

Ê Remove the power supply units as described in section "Removing a power supply unit" on page 100.

Figure 31: Disconnecting the power cables

Ê Disconnect the two power cables from the connector "PWR 1" (1) and connector "PWR 2" (2) of the system board.

Figure 32: Removing the screws

Ê Remove the two screws (see circles).

Page 105: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 105

Power supply

Figure 33: Removing the power distribution board

Ê Pull the power distribution board in direction of the arrow (1).

Ê Remove the power distribution board upward (2).

6.5.3 Installing the new power distribution board

Figure 34: Position bolts

Page 106: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

106 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Power supply

Figure 35: Installing the power distribution board

Ê Position the power distribution board on the two bolts (see circles in figure 34) (1).

Ê Push the power distribution board in the direction of the arrow (2).

Figure 36: Fastening the power distribution board

Ê Fasten the power distribution board with the two screws (see circles).

Page 107: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 107

Power supply

Figure 37: Connecting the power cables

Ê Connect the two power cables to the connector "PWR 2" (1) and connector "PWR 1" (2) of the system board.

Ê Install all power supply units you removed beforehand as described in section "Installing the power supply unit" on page 96.

6.5.4 Concluding steps

Perform the following procedures:

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 108: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

108 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Power supply

Page 109: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 109

7 Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

● The hard disk drive or solid state drive must not be removed from the installation frame by anyone except a service technician.

● The HDD/SSD modules (drives) must all be marked clearly so that they can be put back in their original places after an upgrade. If this is not done, existing data can be lost.

● The hot-plug function is only possible in conjunction with a corresponding RAID configuration.

Further information about the RAID configuration or RAID level can be found in the RAID controller documentation.

● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edges of the circuit boards.

● Before removing the unit, wait for about 30 seconds until the disk stops spinning completely.

● When a hard disk drive is starting up, a resonant noise may be audible for a short while. This does not indicate a failure.

● Depending on the OS, you can configure the write cache settings for the hard disk drives. If a power failure should occur while the write cache is enabled, cached data may be lost.

● When disposing of, transferring, or returning a hard disk drive or solid state drive, wipe out the data on the drive for your own security.

● Rough handling of hard disk drives may damage the stored data. To cope with any unexpected problems, always back up important data. When backing up data to another hard disk drive, you should make backups on a file or partition basis.

● Be careful not to hit the hard disk drive or bring it into contact with metallic objects.

● Handle the device on a shock and vibration free surface.

Page 110: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

110 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

● Do not use the device in extremely hot or cold locations, or locations with extreme temperature changes.

● Never attempt to disassemble the hard disk drive or solid state drive.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

7.1 Basic information

The hard disk drives or solid state drives which can be ordered for the PRIMERGY RX200 S8 are supplied already mounted in an installation frame so that defective drives can be replaced and new drives can be added during operation. The hard disk drive or solid state drive and the installation frame together make up the HDD module or SSD module.

The server is shipped with one of the following configurations:

– configuration with up to four HDD/SSD modules and optional ODD– configuration with up to eight HDD/SSD modules

Each HDD/SSD module can accommodate a SAS/SATA hard disk drive or SATA solid state drive with a 2.5-inch format. The HDD/SSD modules are connected to the HDD backplane wirelessly. This allows HDD/SSD modules to be plugged in or pulled out easily. If the server has a corresponding RAID configuration, defective HDD/SSD modules can also be replaced during operation.

Hybrid configurations of SAS and SATA HDD/SSD modules are not supported.

I For information on RAID controllers controlling the HDD/SSD modules see chapter "Expansion cards and backup units" on page 137.

7.1.1 General equipping rules

– Solid state drives (SSDs) are always equipped before installing hard disk drives.

– If only one HDD/SSD module is installed, the HDD/SSD module will be installed in position 1. Free bays must be equipped with a dummy module.

Page 111: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 111

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.1.2 Configuration with up to four HDD/SSD modules

Figure 38: Equipping the four HDD/SSD bays

SAS connectivity

HDD/SSD naming scheme

I The HDD/SSD numbering as listed in the ServerView RAID Manager differs from the HDD/SSD mounting order:

7.1.3 Configuration with up to eight HDD/SSD modules

Figure 39: Equipping the eight HDD/SSD bays

Controller Channel Connection

SAS controller in slot 4 1 Drives 1, 2, 3, 4

2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs

BayRAID

Manager #

Channellog.

Drive #Bay

RAID Manager

#Channel

log. Drive #

1 [0] 1 0 2 [1] 1 1

3 [2] 1 2 4 [3] 1 3

Table 4: HDD naming scheme

Page 112: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

112 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

SAS connectivity

HDD/SSD naming scheme

I The HDD/SSD numbering as listed in the ServerView RAID Manager differs from the HDD/SSD mounting order:

7.2 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

7.2.1 Preliminary steps

No steps needed.

Controller Channel Connection

SAS controller in slot 41 Drives 1, 2, 3, 4

2 Drives 5, 6, 7, 8

2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs

BayRAID

Manager #

Channellog.

Drive #Bay

RAID Manager

#Channel

log. Drive #

1 [0] 1 0 2 [1] 1 1

3 [2] 1 2 4 [3] 1 3

5 [4] 2 4 6 [5] 2 5

7 [6] 2 6 8 [7] 2 7

Table 5: HDD naming scheme

Customer Replaceable Unit(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 113: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 113

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.2 Removing the 2.5-inch dummy module

I Dummy modules protect free bays against environmental impact. Remove the dummy module before installing an additional HDD/SSD module.

Figure 40: Removing the 2.5-inch dummy module

Ê Press both tabs on the dummy module together until the locking mechanism disengages (1).

Ê Pull the dummy module out of the bay (2).

V CAUTION!

Store the dummy module in a safe place. If you have removed an HDD/SSD module and do not install a new one in its place, put the dummy module back in its place for cooling, to comply with EMC regulations (regulations regarding electromagnetic compatibility), and for protection against fire. Ensure that the dummy module engages correctly in the bay.

Page 114: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

114 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.3 Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Figure 41: Unlocking the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Ê Release the locking mechanism as follows:

1. Press the two green tabs of the locking lever together (1).

2. Push the handle of the HDD/SSD module fully in the direction of the arrow (2). The HDD/SSD module is now unlocked.

Figure 42: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Ê Carefully push the HDD/SSD module into the empty bay (1) until it stops.

Ê Push the handle completely (2) in the direction of the arrow until the locking mechanism engages.

Page 115: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 115

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 85

7.3 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

V Only applicable for removing non-defective HDD/SSD modules:

Ê Set the drive to "Offline" via the software (RAID controller configuration software), before removing an HDD/SSD module that is not defective.

7.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê Ensure that the HDD/SSD module to be removed is not combined into a RAID array. If the drive is part of a RAID array, you first need to delete the array using ServerView RAID Manager.

V CAUTION!

All data on all HDDs/SSDs in the array will be lost! Be sure to back up your data before deleting a RAID array.

I For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID Management" user guide.

Customer Replaceable Unit(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 116: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

116 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.2 Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Figure 43: Unlocking the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Ê Release the locking mechanism as follows:

1. Press the two green tabs of the locking lever together (1).

2. Push the handle of the HDD/SSD module fully in the direction of the arrow (2). The HDD/SSD module is now unlocked.

Ê Pull the HDD/SSD module out a few centimeters.

Ê Wait for at least 30 seconds.

I This is not necessary when removing a solid state drive.

I This period is necessary for the RAID controller to recognize that an HDD module has been removed and for the hard disk drive to come to a stop.

Ê Pull the HDD/SSD module out completely.

Page 117: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 117

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.3.3 Installing the 2.5-inch dummy module

Figure 44: Installing the 2.5-inch dummy module

Ê Push the dummy module into the empty bay until it engages.

7.3.4 Concluding steps

No steps needed.

7.4 Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

V CAUTION!

● Only remove an HDD/SSD module during operation if the drive is not currently being accessed. Observe the indicators for the corresponding HDD/SSD modules, see "RX200 S8 Server - Operating Manual".

● Under no circumstances should you remove an HDD/SSD module while the system is in operation if you are not sure that the drive is operated by a RAID controller and belongs to a disk array that is operating in RAID level 1, 1E, 10, 5, 50, 6 or 60.

Customer Replaceable Unit(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 118: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

118 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

An HDD/SSD module can only be replaced during operation in conjunction with a corresponding RAID configuration.

● All HDD/SSD modules (drives) must be uniquely identified so that they can be reinstalled in their original bays later. If this is not done, existing data can be lost.

V Only applicable for removing non-defective HDD/SSD modules:

Ê Set the drive to "Offline" via the software (RAID controller configuration software), before removing an HDD/SSD module that is not defective.

7.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Locating the defective component" on page 45

7.4.2 Removing the defective 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Ê Remove the HDD/SSD module as described in section "Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 116.

7.4.3 Installing the new 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Ê Install the HDD/SSD module as described in section "Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 114.

7.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on page 85

Page 119: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 119

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.5 Replacing the 4xHDD backplane

7.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

7.5.2 Removing the defective 4xHDD backplane

Ê Release all HDD/SSD modules and pull them out a few centimeters, see section "Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 116

I The HDD/SSD modules need not to be completely removed. But if you want to completely remove them nevertheless, check if all HDD/SSD modules are uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original bays.

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 120: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

120 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 45: Disconnecting the cables from the 4xHDD backplane

Ê Disconnect the following cables from the 4xHDD backplane:

– (1) SAS/SATA data cable from connector "CN1"– (2) power cable from connector "CN20"– (3) I2C cable (HDD monitoring) from connector "CN14" (if applicable)– (4) ODD cable from connector "CN18"

For the cable plan see section "Cabling" on page 322.

Page 121: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 121

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 46: Removing the 4xHDD backplane

Ê Pull the 4xHDD backplane upward until the lower cant gets out of the guides (see close-up).

Ê Take the 4xHDD backplane from the hooks.

7.5.3 Installing the new 4xHDD backplane

Figure 47: Installing the 4xHDD backplane

Ê Position the 4xHDD backplane on the hooks.

Ê Push the 4xHDD backplane downward. Make sure that the lower cant of the 4xHDD backplane fits in the guides (see close-up).

V CAUTION!

Ensure that none of the cables are strained or damaged!

Ê Connect the cables to the 4xHDD backplane as shown in figure 45.

Page 122: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

122 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê Insert all HDD/SSD modules, see section "Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 114.

I Make sure that you reinstall the HDD/SSD module in the bay it was located before the 4xHDD backplane replacement.

7.5.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

7.6 Replacing the 8xHDD backplane

7.6.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 123: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 123

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.6.2 Removing the defective 8xHDD backplane

Ê Release all HDD/SSD modules and pull them out a few centimeters, see section "Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 116

I The HDD/SSD modules need not to be completely removed. But if you want to completely remove them nevertheless, check if all HDD/SSD modules are uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original bays.

Figure 48: Disconnecting cables from the 8xHDDbackplane

Ê Disconnect the following cables from the 8xHDD backplane:

– (1) SAS data cable channel A from connector "CN1"– (2) power cable from connector "CN20"– (3) I2C cable (HDD monitoring) from connector "CN14" (if applicable)

Ê Disconnect the SAS data cable (4) from the RAID controller connector "MLC1".For the cable plan see section "Cabling" on page 322.

Ê Remove all fan modules as described in section "Removing the defective fan module" on page 135.

I Check if all fan modules are uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original bays.

Page 124: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

124 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 49: Removing the fan cage

Ê Remove the four screws (1).

Ê Push the fan cage somewhat in direction of the arrow (2) to disengage the hooks (see close-up).

Ê Remove the fan cage upward (3).

Figure 50: Removing the 8xHDD backplane

Ê Pull the 8xHDD backplane upward until the lower cant gets out of the guides (see close-up).

Ê Take the 8xHDD backplane from the hooks.

Page 125: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 125

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 51: Disconnecting the SAS data cable from the 8xHDDbackplane

Ê Disconnect the SAS data cable from the 8xHDD backplane:

– (1-4) SAS data cable connector P1 - P2 from the corresponding connectors

– (5) SGPIO connector from connector "CN8"

For the cable plan see section "Cabling" on page 322.

7.6.3 Installing the new 8xHDD backplane

Ê Connect the SAS data cable to the 8xHDD backplane as shown in figure 51.

Figure 52: Installing the 8xHDD backplane

Ê Position the 8xHDD backplane on the hooks.

Ê Push the 8xHDD backplane downward. Make sure that the lower cant of the 8xHDD backplane fits in the guides (see close-up).

V CAUTION!

Ensure that none of the cables are strained or damaged!

Page 126: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

126 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 53: Installing the fan cage

Ê Insert the fan cage (1).

Ê Push the fan cage somewhat in direction of the arrow (2) to engage the hooks (see close-up).

Ê Fasten fan cage with the four screws (3).

Ê Install all fan modules as described in section "Installing the new fan module" on page 136.

I Make sure that you reinstall the fan module in the bay it was located before the 8xHDD backplane replacement.

Ê Connect the cables to the 8xHDD backplane as shown in figure 48.

Ê Insert all HDD/SSD modules, see section "Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 114.

I Make sure that you reinstall the HDD/SSD module in the bay it was located before the 8xHDD backplane replacement.

7.6.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Page 127: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 127

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

7.7 Converting to configuration up to eight HDD/SSD modules

7.7.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

7.7.2 Removing the 4xHDD backplane and the ODD cage

Ê Remove the 4xHDD backplane as described in section "Removing the defective 4xHDD backplane" on page 119.

Ê If applicable, remove the ODD from its bay.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: Replacing the cage: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Page 128: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

128 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 54: Removing the ODD cable

Ê Disconnect the ODD cable from the connector "SATA 1" on the system board (see circle).

Figure 55: Removing the screw

Ê Remove the screw (see circle).

Page 129: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 129

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 56: Removing the ODD cage

Ê Remove the ODD cage frontward.

Ê Thread the ODD cable through the opening.

7.7.3 Installing the 2xHDD cage and the 8xHDD backplane

Figure 57: Installing the 2xHDD cage

Ê Push the 2xHDD cage as far as possible in the bay.

Page 130: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

130 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Figure 58: Fastening the 2x HDD cage

Ê Fasten the 2xHDD cage with the screw (see circle).

Ê Remove the fan cage as described in section "Removing the defective 8xHDD backplane" on page 123.

Ê If applicable, install a 2-channel RAID controller as described in section "Installing an expansion card - slot 4" on page 159.

Ê Install the 8xHDD backplane as described in section "Installing the new 8xHDD backplane" on page 125.

Figure 59: Removing the HDD locks

Ê Pull out the two HDD locks frontward.

Ê Remove the two dummy modules as described in section "Removing the 2.5-inch dummy module" on page 113.

Page 131: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 131

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Ê Install the HDD/SSD modules, see section "Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 114.

I Make sure that you install the HDD/SSD modules in the sequence described in section "Configuration with up to eight HDD/SSD modules" on page 111.

7.7.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Page 132: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

132 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Hard disk drives / solid state drives

Page 133: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 133

8 Fans

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

● Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.

● Devices inside the server remain hot after shutdown. Wait for a while after shutdown before installing or removing internal options.

● The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Before handling them, first touch a metal part of the server to discharge static electricity from your body.

● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edges of the circuit boards.

● If devices are installed or disassembled using methods other than those outlined in this chapter, the warranty will be invalidated.

● The installation indicated on this note is sometimes changed to the kind of possible options without notice.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

Page 134: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

134 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Fans

8.1 Basic information

Base units are supplied with four hot-plug fan modules (single CPU configuration and depending on CPU type) or six hot-plug fan modules (two CPUs configuration and depending on CPU type). Each fan module consists of two fans, implemented in one housing.

Base units with four fan modules operate in a 1 of 4 redundancy, base units with six fan modules operate in a 1 of 6 redundancy. In other words, if one of the four or six fan modules fails, the system will operate without any problem. The failed fan module can be exchanged without shutting down the server.

Figure 60: Numbering of the fan modules

INDICATECSS

Battery

CPU 2 DIMM 3F

CPU 2 DIMM 2F

CPU 2 DIMM 1E

CPU 2 DIMM 2E

CPU 2 DIMM 3E

CPU 2 DIMM 1F

CPU 2 DIMM 1G

CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 3H

CPU 2 DIMM 2H

CPU 2 DIMM 1H

CPU 2 DIMM 3G

PCH

K

FAN

11/1

2

SYSSATA 1

SAS 1

SMB SAS

Front PanelPWR 1

BP PWR

Front LAN M

CPU 2

FAN

9/10

SY

S

FAN

7/8

SYS

FAN

5/6

SYS

FAN

3/4

SYS

FAN

1/2

SYS

Slot riser card / slot 4

K

K

K

K

K

FAN 11/12

FAN 9/10

FAN 7/8

FAN 5/6

FAN 3/4

FAN 1/2

PWR 2

Page 135: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 135

Fans

8.2 Replacing a fan module

8.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Extending the server out of the rack" on page 48

Ê "Removing the fan cover" on page 51

Ê "Locating the defective component" on page 45

8.2.2 Removing the defective fan module

Figure 61: Removing the fan module

Ê Take out the fan module upward.

Customer Replaceable Unit(CRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 136: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

136 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Fans

8.2.3 Installing the new fan module

Figure 62: Installing the fan module

Ê Insert the fan module (1).

Ê First press down the rubber pins on the connector side (A), until they engage (2).

Ê Then press down the rubber pins on the opposite side, until they engage (3).

8.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the fan cover" on page 53

Ê "Sliding the server into the rack" on page 56

Ê "Performing a fan test after replacing a defective fan" on page 90

I When a fan module fails, the remaining fan modules will start operating at full speed. After the defective fan module has been replaced, all fan modules will continue to run at full speed for a couple of minutes, before resetting to a lower speed.

Ensure that all fan modules reset to a normal operating speed.

A

Page 137: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 137

9 Expansion cards and backup units

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

● Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.

● Devices and components inside the server remain hot after shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to cool down before installing or removing internal options.

● Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up (e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-sensitive devices (ESDs).

● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit boards by their metallic areas or edges.

● If devices are installed or disassembled using methods other than those outlined in this chapter, the warranty will be invalidated.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

Page 138: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

138 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.1 Basic information

With three riser modules, the system offers four PCIe slots.

Figure 63: Numbering of the riser modules

1 Riser module 1 offers slot 1

2 Riser module 2 offers slot 2 and slot 3

3 Riser module 3 offers slot 4

Slot no. Description

Slot 1 PCIe-2 x16, low profile, half length

Slot 2 PCIe-2 x8, low profile, half length

Slot 3 PCIe-2 x8, low profile, half length

Slot 4 PCIe-2 x8, low profile, half length, modular RAID controller only

Page 139: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 139

Expansion cards and backup units

9.1.1 Equipping the PCIe slots

Ê Slot 4 is reserved for modular RAID controller only.

PCI bus type

Max pcs per system

Slot no Forbidden slot1 2 3 4

Controller for special slots

S26361-F3629-E702upgrade kit to 2xGbit+2x10Gbit LAN

in-builtD2755-A100

1 - 1 - - 1, 3, 4

S26361-F3740-E701upgrade kit to 4xGbit onboard

D3035

1 - 1 - - 1, 3, 4

S26361-F3739-E701upgrade kit to 6xGbit onboard

D3045

1 - 1 - - 1, 3, 4

SAS RAID

S26361-F3554-E8based on LSI2008S26361-D2607-A**

1 - - - 1 1, 2, 3

S26361-F3554-E512based on LSI2108S26361-D2616-A**

1 - - - 1 1, 2, 3

S26361-F3669-E3based on LSI2208 S26361-D3116-C**

1 - - - 1 1, 2, 3

S26361-F3713-E203LSI MegaRAID

SAS 9286CV-8e

1 - 2 1 - 1, 4

SAS

S26361-F3628-E201LSI SAS9200-8e

2 3 2 1 - 4

PCIe SSD

S26361-F4522-E781PCIe-SSD 781GB MLC

ioDrive2 781GB

2 - 1 2 - 1, 4

S26361-F4522-E121PCIe-SSD 1.2TB MLC

ioDrive2 1.2TB

2 - 1 2 - 1, 4

Page 140: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

140 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

PCI bus type

Max pcs per system

Slot no Forbidden slot1 2 3 4

Infiniband

S26361-F4475-E103/E203IB HCA 40Gb 1 and 2 port QDR

enhanced

2 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F4533-E102/E202IB HCA 56Gb 1 and 2 port

2 3 2 1 - 4

FC controller

S26361-F3631-E201QLE2560

3 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3631-E202QLE2562

3 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3961-E201Emulex LPe 1250

3 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3961-E202Emulex LPe 12002

3 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F4494-E201LPe16000

3 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F4494-E202LPe16002

3 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3592-E202Emulex OCe10102

2 3 2 1 - 4

Ethernet controller

S26361-F3516-E201Intel® Gigabit CT Desktop Adapter

(Shelter Island)

3 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3242-E201Intel PRO/1000 PF Server Adapter

(Sheepshead Bay)

4 GB/s 3 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3629-E20210 Gigabit Ethernet contr. dual port

D2755

2 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3740-E201ETH CTRL 2X1GB CU

D3035

3 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3739-E201ETH CTRL 4X1GB CU

D3045

3 3 2 1 - 4

Page 141: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 141

Expansion cards and backup units

I For the latest information of the installing order, refer to your server’s hardware configurator available online at the following address:

for the EMEA market:http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html

for the Japanese market:http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/

PCI bus type

Max pcs per system

Slot no Forbidden slot1 2 3 4

Ethernet controller

D2735 Dual Port Kawela 3 3 2 1 - 4

D2745 Quad Port Barton Hills 3 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3752-E202Eth Ctrl X540-T2

2 3 1 2 - 4

Miscellaneous

S26361-F2748-E637Nvidia NVS300

1 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3749-ExxxUSB3.0 PCIe x1 adapter card

1 3 2 1 - 4

S26361-F3120-E3Serial Port Option

1 1 2 3 - 4

Page 142: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

142 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.2 Handling slot brackets

9.2.1 Installing a slot bracket

I Use the low profile bracket perforated for the ModularRAID controllers based on LSI MegaRAID.

Figure 64: Perforated and non-perforated slot brackets

Installing the slot bracket

Ê Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket.

Ê Fasten the slot bracket to the controller with two M3 x 4.5 mm screws.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

1 Full height bracket non-perforated

2 Full height bracket perforated

3 Low profile bracket perforated

Page 143: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 143

Expansion cards and backup units

Example network adapter D2755

Figure 65: Placing the slot bracket - D2755

Ê Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket (1).

Ê Carefully shift the slot bracket towards the controller until the plug shells engage with the cut-outs in the slot bracket connector panel (2).

Ê Ensure that the ESD springs on the plug shells properly engage with the slot bracket as shown (see circles).

Figure 66: Fastening the slot bracket - D2755

Ê Fasten the slot bracket to the controller with two M3 x 4.5 mm screws.

Page 144: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

144 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 67: Assembled network adapter D2755

Example network adapter D3035

Figure 68: Placing the slot bracket - D3035

Ê Place the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket (1).

Ê Carefully shift the slot bracket towards the controller (2) until the plug shells engage with the cut-outs in the slot bracket connector panel (see close-up).

Page 145: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 145

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 69: Fastening the slot bracket - D3035

Ê Secure the slot bracket to the controller with two M3 x 4.5 mm screws.

Figure 70: Assembled network adapter D3035

Page 146: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

146 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Example network adapter D3045

Figure 71: Placing the slot bracket - D3045

Ê Hinge the slot bracket to the plug shell as shown (1).

Ê Fold the slot bracket towards the controller until the threaded mounting tab is aligned with the screw hole on the controller (2).

Figure 72: Fastening the slot bracket - D3045

Ê Secure the slot bracket to the controller with one M3 x 4.5 mm screw.

Page 147: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 147

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 73: Assembled network adapter D3045

9.2.2 Removing a slot bracket

Removing the slot bracket

Ê Remove the two screws.

Ê Remove the controller from the mounting tabs on the slot bracket.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Page 148: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

148 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.3 Handling SFP+ transceiver modules

For Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) configurations, the Ethernet server adapter is equipped with one or two SFP+ (small form-factor pluggable) transceiver modules.

9.3.1 Installing SFP+ transceiver modules

Preparing the SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 74: Removing the protective optical port plug

Ê Remove the SFP+ transceiver module from its protective packaging.

Ê Remove the optical port plug from the new / additional SFP+ transceiver module.

V CAUTION!

– Always keep the protective port plugs attached to the transceiver optical bores and fiber-optic cable connectors until you are ready to make a connection.

– Save the protective port plug for future use.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 149: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 149

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 75: Unlatching the locking bail

Ê Carefully unlatch and fold down the locking bail on the SFP+ transceiver module.

Inserting the SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 76: Installing the first SFP+ transceiver module

Ê Insert and slide the SFP+ transceiver module into the socket connector as far as it will go.

I If only one slot is equipped with a SFP+ transceiver module, use the left connector as shown.

Page 150: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

150 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 77: Latching the locking bail

Ê Carefully fold up and latch the locking bail.

Figure 78: Installing the protective optical port plug

Ê If the SFP+ transceiver module is not immediately connected to an LC connector, attach the protective optical port plug to the transceiver optical bores.

Page 151: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 151

Expansion cards and backup units

Installing the secondary SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 79: Installing the secondary SFP+ transceiver module

Ê If applicable, install the secondary SFP+ transceiver module accordingly.

9.3.2 Removing an SFP+ transceiver module

For Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) configurations, the ethernet server adapter is equipped with one or two SFP+ (small form-factor pluggable) transceiver modules.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 152: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

152 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 80: Removing the protective optical port plug

Ê If present, remove the protective optical port plug from the SFP+ transceiver module.

V CAUTION!

Save the protective port plug for future use.

Figure 81: Unlatching the locking bail

Ê Carefully unlatch and fold down the locking bail on the SFP+ transceiver module to eject the transceiver from the socket connector.

Page 153: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 153

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 82: Removing the SFP+ transceiver module

Ê Pull the SFP+ transceiver module out of its socket connector.

Ê Attach the protective optical port plug to the transceiver optical bores.

I Place the removed SFP+ transceiver module in an antistatic bag or other protective environment.

Page 154: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

154 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4 Expansion cards and riser cards

9.4.1 Installing an expansion card - slot 1-3

9.4.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê Remove the corresponding riser module as described in section "Removing the riser module 1" on page 58 or "Removing the riser module 2" on page 59.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutesSoftware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 155: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 155

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.1.2 Removing the slot cover - slot 1-3

Figure 83: Removing the slot cover - slot 1

Figure 84: Removing the slot cover - slot 2 (1) and slot 3 (2)

Ê Pull out the slot cover of the corresponding slot.

V CAUTION!

Keep the slot cover for future use. If the expansion card is removed and not replaced with a new one, the slot cover must be reinstalled due to cooling, to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on electromagnetic compatibility) and to protect against fire.

Page 156: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

156 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.1.3 Installing the expansion card - slot 1-3

Ê Please read the documentation supplied with the expansion card.

Figure 85: Installing the expansion card - slot 1

Figure 86: Installing the expansion card - slot 2

A

B

A

B

Page 157: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 157

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 87: Installing the expansion card - slot 3

Ê Carefully press the expansion card into the riser card slot (A), until it clicks into place (1). Make sure that the lug on the slot cover (B) clicks into place in the corresponding hole (2).

Figure 88: Example : connecting NCSI cable to expansion card

A

B

Page 158: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

158 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 89: Example : connecting NCSI cable to system board

Ê If necessary, connect the cables to the expansion cards and other components.

I Connecting the NCSI cable is only necessary in order to use the Modular LAN controller as a shared LAN interface, that allows both, management and dedicated LAN connections.

9.4.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 1" on page 59 or "Installing the riser module 2" on page 60

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 74

Ê If applicable, "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 75

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 159: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 159

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.2 Installing an expansion card - slot 4

9.4.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

9.4.2.2 Installing the expansion card - slot 4

Ê Please read the documentation supplied with the expansion card.

Figure 90: Installing the expansion card - slot 4

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutesSoftware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

A

Page 160: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

160 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Carefully press the expansion card into the riser card slot (A), until it clicks into place.

Ê Position the expansion card on the distance holder (see circle).

Figure 91: Connecting cables

Ê If necessary, connect the cables to the expansion card.

9.4.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 74

Ê If applicable, "Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 75

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 161: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 161

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.3 Removing an expansion card - slot 1-3

9.4.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê Remove the corresponding riser module as described in section "Removing the riser module 1" on page 58 or "Removing the riser module 2" on page 59.

9.4.3.2 Removing the expansion card - slot 1-3

Figure 92: Removing the expansion card - slot 1

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 162: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

162 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 93: Removing the expansion card- slot 2

Figure 94: Installing the expansion card - slot 3

Ê If necessary, disconnect the cables from the expansion cards.

Ê Pull out the expansion card from the riser card slot.

Page 163: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 163

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.3.3 Installing the slot cover - slot 1-3

Figure 95: Installing the slot cover - slot 1

Figure 96: Installing the slot cover -slot 2 (1) and slot 3 (2)

Ê Insert the slot cover of the corresponding slot.

Make sure that the lug on the slot cover (A) clicks into place in the corresponding hole.

A

A

Page 164: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

164 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 1" on page 59 or "Installing the riser module 2" on page 60

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

9.4.4 Removing an expansion card - slot 4

9.4.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

9.4.4.2 Removing the expansion card - slot 4

Ê If necessary, disconnect the cables from the expansion card.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 165: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 165

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 97: Removing the expansion card - slot 4

Ê Take the expansion card from the distance holder (1).

Ê Pull out the expansion card from the riser card slot (2).

9.4.4.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 166: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

166 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.5 Replacing an expansion card

Note on network settings recovery

I When replacing network controllers or the system board, network configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming configurations.

Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a network controller or the system board.

9.4.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê If applicable, ensure to note down your current network settings in the operating system.

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Locating the defective component" on page 45

Ê Remove the corresponding riser module as described in section "Handling riser modules" on page 58.

9.4.5.2 Removing the defective expansion card

Ê Remove the expansion card as described in section "Removing the expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 161 or "Removing the expansion card - slot 4" on page 164.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutesSoftware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 167: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 167

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.5.3 Installing the new expansion card

Ê Install the expansion card as described in section "Installing the expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 156 or "Installing the expansion card - slot 4" on page 159.

9.4.5.4 Concluding steps

Ê Install the corresponding riser module as described in section "Handling riser modules" on page 58.

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 79

Ê "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 74

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Ê After replacing a network controller in a server running Linux OS, "Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 83.

Ê If applicable, reconfigure your network settings in the operation system according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion card or onboard).

I Configuration of network settings should be performed by the customer. For further information, please refer to section "Note on network settings recovery" on page 166

Ê If applicable, restore LAN teaming configurations, see "After replacing / upgrading LAN controllers" on page 88.

Ê Inform the customer about changed WWN and MAC addresses, see "Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 86.

Page 168: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

168 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.6 Replacing a riser card

9.4.6.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Locating the defective component" on page 45

Ê Remove the corresponding riser module as described in section "Handling riser modules" on page 58.

9.4.6.2 Removing the defective riser card

Ê Remove the expansion card as described in section "Removing the expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 161 or "Removing the expansion card - slot 4" on page 164.

Figure 98: Removing the riser card - slot 1

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Page 169: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 169

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 99: Removing the riser card - slot 2 and slot 3

Figure 100: Removing the riser card - slot 4

Ê Remove the two screws (1).

Ê Remove the riser card (2).

Page 170: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

170 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.6.3 Installing the new riser card

Figure 101: Installing the riser card - slot 1

Figure 102: Installing the riser card - slot 2 and slot 3

Page 171: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 171

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 103: Installing the riser card - slot 4

Ê Insert the riser card (1).

Ê Fasten the riser card with two screws (2).

Ê Install the expansion card as described in section "Installing the expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 156 or "Installing the expansion card - slot 4" on page 159.

9.4.6.4 Concluding steps

Ê Install the corresponding riser module as described in section "Handling riser modules" on page 58.

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Page 172: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

172 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.7 Replacing TFM

9.4.7.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Locating the defective component" on page 45

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

9.4.7.2 Removing the defective TFM

Ê Remove the depending expansion card as described in section "Removing an expansion card - slot 4" on page 164.

Figure 104: Disconnecting the FBU cable from the TFM

Ê Disconnect the FBU cable from the TFM.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

Page 173: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 173

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 105: Removing the TFM

Ê Remove the three screws (1).

Ê Remove the TFM (2).

9.4.7.3 Installing the new TFM

Ê Install the new TFM as described in section "Installing TFM to the RAID controller (if applicable)" on page 180.

Ê Connect the FBU cable to the TFM.

V CAUTION!

● Make sure that the connector side with the three dots is on the top. Otherwise you risk short-circuits.

● Do not connect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.

Ê Install the expansion card as described in section "Installing an expansion card - slot 4" on page 159.

9.4.7.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Page 174: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

174 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5 Backup units (BBU/FBU)

9.5.1 Basic information

The server offers different backup units depending on the used RAID controller:

– BBU (Battery Backup Unit)– FBU (Flash Backup Unit)

The backup unit backs up the memory contents of the connected SAS RAID controller in the event of a power failure. You can install one backup unit.

9.5.2 Installing a BBU

9.5.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

9.5.2.2 Connecting the BBU cable to the BBU

I The BBU cable is available in different length. You need the short cable if the used RAID controller is installed in slot 4.

V CAUTION!

Do not connect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 175: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 175

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 106: Connecting the BBU cable

Ê Connect the BBU cable to the BBU.

V CAUTION!

Make sure that the connector side with the three dots is on the top (see close-up). Otherwise you risk short-circuits.

9.5.2.3 Installing the BBU in the holder

Figure 107: Installing the BBU in the holder

Ê At a slight angle, fit the BBU under the right retaining bracket on the holder (1).

Ê Fold down the BBU until it locks in place (2).

Page 176: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

176 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.2.4 Installing the BBU with the holder

Figure 108: Position of the shoulder screw caps

Figure 109: Installing the BBU with the holder

Ê Insert the holder into the chassis so that the three shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.

Ê Slide the holder in direction of the arrow.

Page 177: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 177

Expansion cards and backup units

The shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor will lock in the narrow ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.

Ê Ensure that the locking handle on the holder properly snaps in place (see circle).

Figure 110: Connecting the BBU cable to the RAID controller

Ê Install a RAID controller as described in section "Installing the expansion card - slot 4" on page 159.

Ê Connect the BBU cable to the RAID controller (see circle).

V CAUTION!

● Make sure that the connector side with the three dots is on the top. Otherwise you risk short-circuits.

● Do not connect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.

Page 178: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

178 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 111: Routing the BBU cable (Example A)

Figure 112: Routing the BBU cable (Example B)

Ê Route the BBU cable as shown in the figure.

9.5.2.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 74

Page 179: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 179

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Note on BBU charging and calibration

The BBU may be deeply discharged due to extended storage time and wrongly show as bad or defective in the ServerView RAID Manager.

In this case, the BBU will automatically enter a trickle charge cycle for recovery. This initial charge may take up to 12 hours before the BBU will initiate a recalibration cycle.

Ê Enter the ServerView RAID Manager and check the current BBU status.

I For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID Management" user guide.

Ê If the BBU is shown as bad or defective, do not power off the server for at least 12 hours to allow the charge and calibration cycles to finish.

Ê If the BBU status does not change after 12 hours, please try to initiate the recalibration process manually using the ServerView RAID Manager.

I If this procedure still does not fix the BBU status, please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner.

9.5.3 Installing an FBU

9.5.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver (for installing TFM)

Page 180: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

180 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.3.2 Installing TFM to the RAID controller (if applicable)

Figure 113: TFM kit

Figure 114: Installing TFM

Ê Fit the spacer bolts of the TFM on the RAID controller (1).

Ê Secure the TFM on the RAID controller with the three screws (2).

1 TFM 2 Screws

Page 181: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 181

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.3.3 Installing the FBU in the holder

Figure 115: Installing the FBU in the holder (A)

Ê At a slight angle, fit the FBU under the right retaining bracket on the holder.

Ê Push down the FBU until it locks in place.

Figure 116: Installing the FBU in the holder (B)

Ê Ensure that the FBU is properly seated in the holder as shown.

Page 182: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

182 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.3.4 Connecting the FBU cable to the FBU

I The FBU cable is available in different length. You need the short cable if the used RAID controller is installed in slot 4.

Figure 117: Connecting the FBU cable

Ê Connect the FBU cable to the FBU.

9.5.3.5 Installing the FBU with the holder

Figure 118: Position of the shoulder screw caps

Page 183: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 183

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 119: Installing the FBU with the holder

Ê Insert the holder into the chassis so that the three shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.

Ê Slide the holder in direction of the arrow.

The shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor will lock in the narrow ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.

Ê Ensure that the locking handle on the holder properly snaps in place (see circle).

Figure 120: Connecting the FBU cable to the RAID controller

Ê If applicable, install a RAID controller in slot 3 as described in section "Installing an expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 154.

Page 184: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

184 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Connect the FBU cable to the RAID controller (see circle).

Figure 121: Routing the FBU cable (Example A)

Figure 122: Routing the FBU cable (Example B)

Ê Route the FBU cable as shown in the figure.

Page 185: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 185

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.3.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 74

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

9.5.4 Removing a BBU

V CAUTION!

● Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.

● Do not throw battery backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

9.5.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 186: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

186 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.4.2 Removing the BBU with the holder

Figure 123: Disconnecting the BBU cable from the RAID controller

Ê Disconnect the BBU cable from the RAID controller (see circle).

V CAUTION!

Do not disconnect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.

Page 187: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 187

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 124: Removing the BBU with the holder

Ê Lift up the green locking handle on the holder (see circle) while sliding the holder in direction of the arrow as far as it will go.

I After that, the shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor will rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.

Ê Lift the holder out of the chassis.

Page 188: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

188 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.4.3 Removing the BBU from the holder

Figure 125: Removing the BBU from the holder

Ê Press out on the retaining bracket on the holder (1), lift the battery at the bottom side and remove the BBU at a slight angle out of the holder (2).

9.5.4.4 Disconnecting the BBU cable from the BBU

Figure 126: Disconnecting the BBU cable from the BBU

Ê Disconnect the BBU cable from the BBU.

V CAUTION!

Do not disconnect the cable using excessive force, the connector is weak.

Page 189: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 189

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.4.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

9.5.5 Removing an FBU

V CAUTION!

● Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.

● Do not throw flash backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

9.5.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 190: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

190 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.5.2 Removing the FBU with the holder

Figure 127: Disconnecting the FBU cable from the RAID controller

Ê Carefully disconnect the FBU cable from the RAID controller (see circle).

Figure 128: Removing the FBU with the holder

Ê Lift up the green locking handle on the holder (see circle) while sliding the holder in direction of the arrow as far as it will go.

I After that, the shoulder screw caps on the chassis floor will rest in the wide ends of the keyhole slots on the holder.

Ê Lift the holder out of the chassis.

Page 191: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 191

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.5.3 Disconnecting the FBU cable from the FBU

Figure 129: Disconnecting the FBU cable from the FBU

Ê Disconnect the FBU cable from the FBU.

9.5.5.4 Removing the FBU from the holder

Figure 130: Removing the FBU from the holder

Ê Pull the FBU at a slight angle out of the holder.

Page 192: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

192 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.5.5 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

9.5.6 Replacing a BBU

V CAUTION!

● Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.

● Do not throw battery backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

9.5.6.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

9.5.6.2 Removing the defective BBU

Ê Remove the BBU with the holder as described in section "Removing the BBU with the holder" on page 186.

Ê Remove the BBU from the holder as described in section "Removing the BBU from the holder" on page 188.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 193: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 193

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê Disconnect the BBU cable from the BBU as described in section "Disconnecting the BBU cable from the BBU" on page 188.

9.5.6.3 Installing the new BBU

Ê Connect the BBU cable to the BBU as described in section "Connecting the BBU cable to the BBU" on page 174.

Ê Install the BBU in the holder as described in section "Installing the BBU in the holder" on page 175.

Ê Install the BBU with the holder as described in section "Installing the BBU with the holder" on page 176.

9.5.6.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 74

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Note on BBU charging and calibration

The BBU may be deeply discharged due to extended storage time and wrongly show as bad or defective in the ServerView RAID Manager.

In this case, the BBU will automatically enter a trickle charge cycle for recovery. This initial charge may take up to 12 hours before the BBU will initiate a recalibration cycle.

Ê Enter the ServerView RAID Manager and check the current BBU status.

I For further information, please refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID Management" user guide.

Ê If the BBU is shown as bad or defective, do not power off the server for at least 12 hours to allow the charge and calibration cycles to finish.

Page 194: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

194 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Ê If the BBU status does not change after 12 hours, please try to initiate the recalibration process manually using the ServerView RAID Manager.

I If this procedure still does not fix the BBU status, please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner.

9.5.7 Replacing an FBU

V CAUTION!

● Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.

● Do not throw flash backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

9.5.7.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

9.5.7.2 Removing the defective FBU

Ê Remove the FBU with the holder as described in section "Removing the FBU with the holder" on page 190.

Ê Disconnect the FBU cable from the FBU as described in section "Disconnecting the FBU cable from the FBU" on page 191.

Ê Remove the FBU from the holder as described in section "Removing the FBU from the holder" on page 191.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 195: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 195

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.7.3 Installing the new FBU

Ê Install the FBU in the holder as described in section "Installing the FBU in the holder" on page 181.

Ê Connect the FBU cable to the FBU as described in section "Connecting the FBU cable to the FBU" on page 182.

Ê Install the FBU with the holder as described in section "Installing the FBU with the holder" on page 182.

9.5.7.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Updating RAID controller firmware" on page 74

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Page 196: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

196 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Expansion cards and backup units

Page 197: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 197

10 Main memory

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

● Do not install unsupported third party memory modules. For further information on supported memory modules, refer to section "Basic information" on page 198. Doing so may cause electric shock, a fire, or failures.

● Memory modules remain hot after shutdown. Wait for components to cool down before installing or removing memory modules to prevent burns.

● Do not insert and remove memory modules repeatedly. Doing so may cause failures.

● If the memory module has not been correctly inserted, it may cause a fire. Insert the memory module with attention to its direction.

● Pressing out the securing clips on the memory module connector will eject the installed memory module. To prevent damage and injuries eject memory modules carefully without applying excessive force.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

Page 198: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

198 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Main memory

10.1 Basic information

Figure 131: Slots of the main memory

– The system board is equipped with 24 memory connectors(12 connectors per CPU).

– In mono processor configurations only 12 memory connectors are usable.

– The system has to be equipped with at least one memory module per processor.

– Supported capacities: 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB or 64 GB

– Maximum amount of RAM: 1536 GB

INDICATECSS

Battery

CPU 2 DIMM 3F

CPU 2 DIMM 2F

CPU 2 DIMM 1E

CPU 2 DIMM 2E

CPU 2 DIMM 3E

CPU 2 DIMM 1F

CPU 2 DIMM 1G

CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 3H

CPU 2 DIMM 2H

CPU 2 DIMM 1H

CPU 2 DIMM 3G

CPU 1 DIMM 1A

CPU 1 DIMM 2A

CPU 1 DIMM 3B

CPU 1 DIMM 2B

CPU 1 DIMM 1B

CPU 1 DIMM 3A

CPU 1 DIMM 3D

CPU 1 DIMM 2D

CPU 1 DIMM 1C

CPU 1 DIMM 2C

CPU 1 DIMM 3C

CPU 1 DIMM 1D

1CN101J9

SMB SAS

Front VGA

BP PWR

Front LAN M

CPU 2

CPU 1FA

N 9/

10

SYS

FAN

7/8

SYS

FAN

5/6

SYS

FAN

3/4

SYS

FAN

1/2

SYS

Slot riser card / slot 4

1

SKU Key

Page 199: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 199

Main memory

Figure 132: Supported memory modules

I For system relevant information, refer to your server’s hardware configurator available online at the following address:

for the EMEA market:http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html

for the Japanese market:http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/

Voltage setting (BIOS)

CPU with 1600MHz DDR3 BusCPU with 1333MHz DDR3 Bus

1R - Single Rank 4R - Quad Rank2R - Dual Rank 8R - Eight Rank

1DPC = 1 DIMM per Channel2DPC = 2 DIMM per Channel3DPC = 3 DIMM per Channel

DPCCPU with 1866MHz DDR3 Bus 1600 1333 1866 1600 1066 1333 1333 1866 1600 1066 1600 1600 10661866 - 1333 -

1333 1066

DPC DPC DPC DPC DPC

1 2

800

800

1 22 3

13331333

Mem. Speed provided by CPU

Real maximum memory-bus speed depending on CPU type, memory configuration (DPC) and voltage setting (BIOS)

UDIMM 1866MHz RDIMM 1866MHz LRDIMM 4R 1600MHz

1.5V [default] 1.35V 1.5V [default] 1.35V 1.5V [default] 1.35V2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

1600 - 1333 -

1

1600 1333 1600 1600

DPC DPC DPC DPC DPC DPC DPC

33 1

DPC DPC DPC DPC DPC

1333 10663331008333133316601

1066 1333 1333 1600 1600 1066 1600 1600 1066

1333 - 1333 1333 - 13331333

Page 200: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

200 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Main memory

10.1.1 Memory sequence

10.1.1.1 Population rules

– Populate memory slot 1 / channel A (DIMM 1A) first.

– In case of dual processor configurations, populate memory slot 1 / channel E (DIMM 1E) second.

– Within all channels, memory slot 1 must be populated prior to slot 2.Slot 2 must be populated prior to Slot 3 (for all CPUs).

– If memory modules with different ranks are used, always populate the higher number rank DIMM first (starting from slot 1).

– If memory modules with different capacities are used:

– Populate modules with higher capacities first.– Within a channel, populate modules in descending order of capacity.

– If memory modules with different speeds are used, the lowest clock rate applies for all DIMMs.

Regardless of the mode, all DIMMs will run at the highest common frequency that is allowed by the SPD Data of the DIMMs and the maximum speed of the selected configuration.

– Mixing UDIMMs, RDIMMs or LRDIMMs is not allowed.

– Mixing ECC and non-ECC DIMMs is not allowed.

– Mixing of quad-rank DIMMs in one channel and three DIMMs in another channel (3DPC) on the same CPU is not allowed.

Page 201: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 201

Main memory

10.1.1.2 Independant Channel mode

2 UPC 1 UPC UPCChannel A B D C E F H G

DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

noitarugifnoc UPC onoM sMMID #1 12 1 23 1 3 24 1 3 4 25 1 5 3 4 26 1 5 3 4 2 67 1 5 3 7 4 2 68 1 5 3 7 4 8 2 69 1 5 9 3 7 4 8 2 6

10 1 5 9 3 7 4 8 2 6 10 11 1 5 9 3 7 11 4 8 2 6 10 12 1 5 9 3 7 11 4 8 12 2 6 10

noitarugifnoc UPC lauD sMMID #2 1 23 1 3 24 1 3 2 45 1 5 3 2 46 1 5 3 2 6 47 1 5 7 3 2 6 48 1 5 7 3 2 6 8 49 1 9 5 7 3 2 6 8 4

10 1 9 5 7 3 2 10 6 8 411 1 9 5 7 3 11 2 10 6 8 412 1 9 5 7 3 11 2 10 6 8 4 1213 1 9 5 13 7 3 11 2 10 6 8 4 1214 1 9 5 13 7 3 11 2 10 6 14 8 4 1215 1 9 5 13 7 15 3 11 2 10 6 14 8 4 1216 1 9 5 13 7 15 3 11 2 10 6 14 8 16 4 1217 1 9 17 5 13 7 15 3 11 2 10 6 14 8 16 4 1218 1 9 17 5 13 7 15 3 11 2 10 18 6 14 8 16 4 1219 1 9 17 5 13 7 15 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 8 16 4 1220 1 9 17 5 13 7 15 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 8 16 4 12 2021 1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 8 16 4 12 2022 1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16 4 12 2023 1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 23 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16 4 12 2024 1 9 17 5 13 21 7 15 23 3 11 19 2 10 18 6 14 22 8 16 24 4 12 20

Page 202: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

202 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Main memory

Notes on Independant Channel mode

– Configurations marked in grey are only possible with registered DIMMs (RDIMMS and LR-DIMMs)

10.1.1.3 Mirrored Channel and Performance modes

Notes on Mirrored Channel and Performance modes

– Always populate memory modules in multiples of 4.

– Same numbers mean identical modules (capacity, rank).

2 UPC 1 UPC UPCChannel A B D C E F H G

DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

noitarugifnoc UPC onoM sMMID #4 1 1 1 18 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

12 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

noitarugifnoc UPC lauD sMMID #8 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

12 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 2 2 216 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 420 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 424 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6

Page 203: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 203

Main memory

10.1.1.4 Rank Sparing mode

Single-/Dual-Rank RDIMMs

2 UPC 1 UPC UPCChannel A B D C E F H G

DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

noitarugifnoc UPC onoM sMMID #2 o o3 o o o4 o o o o5 o o o o o6 o o o o o o7 o o o o o o o8 o o o o o o o o9 o o o o o o o o o

10 o o o o o o o o o o11 o o o o o o o o o o o12 o o o o o o o o o o o o

# DIMMs Dual CPU configuration (if all modules are of the same capacity) 4 o o o o5 o o o o o6 o o o o o o7 o o o o o o o8 o o o o o o o o9 o o o o o o o o o

10 o o o o o o o o o o11 o o o o o o o o o o o12 o o o o o o o o o o o o13 o o o o o o o o o o o o o14 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o15 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o16 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o17 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o18 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o19 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o20 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o21 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o22 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o23 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o24 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Page 204: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

204 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Main memory

I For detailed population rules, refer to section "Notes on Rank Sparing mode" on page 206.

2 UPCUPC 1 UPC UPCCh. A B D C Ch. E F H G

DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C DIMM 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

# Dual CPU configuration (if modules are of different capacities) # Dual CPU configuration

(if modules are of different capacities)2 o o 2 o o3 o o o 3 o o o4 o o o o 4 o o o o5 o o o o o 5 o o o o o6 o o o o o o 6 o o o o o o7 o o o o o o o 7 o o o o o o o8 o o o o o o o o 8 o o o o o o o o9 o o o o o o o o o 9 o o o o o o o o o

10 o o o o o o o o o o 10 o o o o o o o o o o11 o o o o o o o o o o o 11 o o o o o o o o o o o12 o o o o o o o o o o o o 12 o o o o o o o o o o o o

Page 205: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 205

Main memory

Quad-Rank RDIMMs

2 UPC 1 UPC UPCChannel A B D C E F H G

DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

noitarugifnoc UPC onoM sMMID #1 o2 o o3 o o o4 o o o o5 o o o o o6 o o o o o o7 o o o o o o o8 o o o o o o o o9 o o o o o o o o o

10 o o o o o o o o o o11 o o o o o o o o o o o12 o o o o o o o o o o o o

# DIMMs Dual CPU configuration (if all modules are of the same capacity) 2 o o3 o o o4 o o o o5 o o o o o6 o o o o o o7 o o o o o o o8 o o o o o o o o9 o o o o o o o o o

10 o o o o o o o o o o11 o o o o o o o o o o o12 o o o o o o o o o o o o13 o o o o o o o o o o o o o14 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o15 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o16 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o17 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o18 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o19 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o20 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o21 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o22 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o23 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o24 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Page 206: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

206 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Main memory

Notes on Rank Sparing mode

– Same numbers mean identical modules (capacity, rank)

– In case of Single-/Dual-Rank memory configurations, at least two 1R or 2R modules must be populated per a channel.

– In case of Quad-Rank memory modules, please note the following: Due to performance reasons, always populate a new channel before installing the 3rd memory slot of a channel.

– Only one memory module capacity per CPU is allowed.

If two different memory module capacities have been ordered for Rank Sparing mode, populate them on different CPUs, so that each CPUs only comprises modules of one capacity

Example:

12 modules have been ordered, 8 x 4 GB and 4 x 8 GB.In this case, proceed as follows:

Ê Use the capacity group with more memory modules for CPU 1 and populate them according to the population sequence for mono CPU configurations.

Ê Populate the other capacity group on CPU 2 according to the population rules for mono CPU configurations.

2 UPCUPC 1 UPC UPCCh. A B D C Ch. E F H G

DIMM 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B 1D 2D 3D 1C 2C 3C DIMM 1E 2E 3E 1F 2F 3F 1H 2H 3H 1G 2G 3G

# Dual CPU configuration (if modules are of different capacities) # Dual CPU configuration

(if modules are of different capacities)1 o 1 o2 o o 2 o o3 o o o 3 o o o4 o o o o 4 o o o o5 o o o o o 5 o o o o o6 o o o o o o 6 o o o o o o7 o o o o o o o 7 o o o o o o o8 o o o o o o o o 8 o o o o o o o o9 o o o o o o o o o 9 o o o o o o o o o

10 o o o o o o o o o o 10 o o o o o o o o o o11 o o o o o o o o o o o 11 o o o o o o o o o o o12 o o o o o o o o o o o o 12 o o o o o o o o o o o o

Page 207: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 207

Main memory

– In order to satisfy cooling requirements, populate memory channels on alternating sides of the processor:

10.2 Installing a memory module

10.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

10.2.2 Selecting the memory slot

Ê Choose the memory slot according to the configuration rules in "Basic information" on page 198.

Order CPU 1 CPU 2

1 Channel A Channel E

2 Channel C Channel G

3 Channel B Channel F

4 Channel D Channel H

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 208: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

208 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Main memory

10.2.3 Installing a memory module

Figure 133: Opening the securing clips

Ê Press the securing clips on both sides of the memory slot concerned outward.

Figure 134: Installing a memory module

Ê Carefully press the memory module into the memory slot (1) until the securing clips on both sides of it engage (2).

10.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 71

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 209: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 209

Main memory

10.3 Removing a memory module

10.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

10.3.2 Removing a memory module

Figure 135: Removing the memory module

Ê Press the securing clips on both sides of the memory slot concerned outward (1).

Ê Pull the memory module out of the slot (2).

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 210: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

210 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Main memory

10.3.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

10.4 Replacing a memory module

10.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Locating the defective component" on page 45

10.4.2 Removing the defective memory module

Ê Remove the memory module as described in section "Removing a memory module" on page 209.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 211: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 211

Main memory

10.4.3 Installing the new memory module

Ê Install the memory module as described in section "Installing a memory module" on page 208.

10.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 71

Ê "Enabling replaced components in the system BIOS" on page 79

Ê "Verifying the memory mode" on page 80

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 212: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

212 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Main memory

Page 213: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 213

11 Processors

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

● Do not install unsupported processors. For further information on supported processors, refer to section "Supported processors" on page 214.

● Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up (e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-sensitive devices (ESDs).

● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit boards by their metallic areas or edges.

● When removing or installing the processor, be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor socket.

● Never touch the underside of the processor. Even minor soiling such as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation or destroy the processor.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

Page 214: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

214 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

11.1 Basic information

Figure 136: CPU slots

11.1.1 Supported processors

– up to two Intel® 4-/6-/8-/10-/12-Core processors (Xeon E5-2xxx or E5-2xxxLv2)

– two processor sockets LGA 2011– supported CPUs from 80 W to 130 W– core frequencies of more than 3 GHz

I For system relevant information, refer to your server’s hardware configurator available online at the following address:

for the EMEA market:http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html

for the Japanese market:http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/

11.1.2 General equipping rules

Both CPUs must be of the same type.

INDICATECSS

CPU 2 DIMM 3F

CPU 2 DIMM 2F

CPU 2 DIMM 1G

CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 3H

CPU 2 DIMM 2H

CPU 2 DIMM 1H

CPU 2 DIMM 3G

CPU 1 DIMM 3B

CPU 1 DIMM 2B

CPU 1 DIMM 3D

CPU 1 DIMM 2D

CPU 1 DIMM 1C

CPU 1 DIMM 2C

CPU 1 DIMM 3C

CPU 1 DIMM 1DCPU 2

CPU 1

FAN

9/10

SY

S

FAN

7/8

SYS

FAN

5/6

SYS

FAN

3/4

SYS

N 1/

2 S

YS

y

Page 215: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 215

Processors

11.2 Upgrading to dual processor configuration

V CAUTION!

– Processors are modules which are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharges and therefore must always be handled with care. After a processor has been removed from its protective sleeve or from its socket, place it with its smooth side down on a non-conducting, antistatic surface. Never push a processor over a surface.

– Only processors of the same type may be used on the system board. That means the number of the internal processor cores as well as the primary clock and the QPI frequency have to be the same.

– For dual operation, use a suitable multiprocessor operating system.

11.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 15 minutesSoftware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Page 216: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

216 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

11.2.2 Installing the processor

Figure 137: Opening socket release lever 1

Ê Unlatch the socket release lever marked Open 1st by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).

Ê The socket release lever will slightly lift up (2).

Figure 138: Opening socket release lever 2

Ê Unlatch the socket release lever marked Close 1st by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).

Ê Fully fold back the second socket release lever (2).

Page 217: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 217

Processors

Figure 139: Opening the load plate (A)

Ê Push down on the first socket release lever (1) to lift the load plate away from the socket (2).

Figure 140: Opening the load plate (B)

Ê Fully open the load plate.

V CAUTION!

Be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor socket!

Page 218: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

218 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

Ê Make sure that the load plate is in the fully open position.

Figure 141: Installing the processor

Ê Hold the processor with your thumb and index finger.

Ê Make sure that the four notches on the processor align with the posts on the socket (see close-up).

Ê Lower the processor straight down without tilting or sliding it in the socket.

V CAUTION!

– Ensure that the processor is level in the socket.– Be careful not to touch or bend the pins on the processor socket.– Never touch the underside of the processor. Even minor soiling

such as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation or destroy the processor.

– Ensure not to scrape or dent the processor edges.

Page 219: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 219

Processors

Figure 142: Closing the load plate

Ê Carefully lower the load plate over the processor.

Figure 143: Removing the protective socket cover

Ê When closing the load plate, the protective socket cover will automatically detach.

Ê Remove the socket cover and save it for future use.

V CAUTION!

Always replace the socket cover if you remove the processor from the socket!

Page 220: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

220 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

Figure 144: Closing socket release lever 2

Ê Fully close and hold shut the load plate.

Ê Close the socket release lever marked Close 1st (1) and latch it under the load plate retention tab to lock down the load plate (2).

Figure 145: Closing socket release lever 1

Ê Close the socket release lever marked Open 1st (1) and latch it under the load plate retention tab (2).

Page 221: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 221

Processors

11.2.3 Installing the heat sink

I Processors with 135W need dedicated heat sinks (part number V26898-B964-V3).

Figure 146: Heat sink (part number V26898-B964-V3)

Ê Remove the protective cover from the heat sink.

V CAUTION!

Ensure not to touch the heat-conductive paste on the bottom of the heat sink.

Page 222: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

222 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

Figure 147: Installing the heat sink

Ê Align the heat sink and fit it on the processor socket.

Ê Position the screws in the holes carefully, making sure they are upright.

V CAUTION!

– Ensure that the screws on the heat sink are properly seated on the threaded holes.

– Ensure that the heat sink cooling fins match the direction of the airflow!

Ê Fasten it in a crossover pattern with four screws according to the numbering (torque 1.0 Nm, the description of this torque value doesn't apply to the Japanese market.)

11.2.4 Upgrading the main memory

Ê Select an adequate memory configuration for "Two CPUs populated" as described in section "Memory sequence" on page 200.

Ê Install memory modules as described in section "Installing a memory module" on page 207.

Page 223: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 223

Processors

11.2.5 Installing two additional fan modules

Figure 148: Removing sponges

Ê Remove the two sponges from the system fan bays "FAN 7/8" and "FAN 9/10".

Figure 149: Installed fan modules

Ê Install two fan modules in the system fan bays "FAN 7/8" and "FAN 9/10" as described in section "Installing the new fan module" on page 136.

11.2.6 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Page 224: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

224 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

Ê "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 71

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

11.3 Replacing a processor

V CAUTION!

Processors are modules which are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharges and therefore must always be handled with care. After a processor has been removed from its protective sleeve or from its socket, place it with its smooth side down on a non-conducting, antistatic surface. Never push a processor over a surface.

11.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 15 minutesSoftware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Page 225: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 225

Processors

11.3.2 Removing the heat sink

Figure 150: Removing the heat sink

Ê Loosen the four screws of the heat sink in a crossover pattern according to the numbering.

Ê Carefully turn the heat sink back and forth to detach it from the processor.

I This may be necessary due to the adhesive quality of the thermal paste located between the heat sink and the processor.

V CAUTION!

Pay special attention not to damage any system board components surrounding the processor socket.

Ê Lift the heat sink out of the chassis.

Ê Remove the residual thermal paste from the underside of the heat sink and the surface of the processor.

Ê Clean the underside of the heat sink and the surface of the processor using a lint-free cloth.

Page 226: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

226 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

11.3.3 Removing the defective processor

Figure 151: Opening socket release lever 1

Ê Unlatch the socket release lever marked Open 1st by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).

Ê The socket release lever will slightly lift up (2).

Figure 152: Opening socket release lever 2

Ê Unlatch the socket release lever marked Close 1st by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).

Ê Fully fold back the second socket release lever (2).

Page 227: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 227

Processors

Figure 153: Opening the load plate (A)

Ê Push down on the socket release lever marked Open 1st (1) to lift the load plate away from the socket (2).

Figure 154: Opening the load plate (B)

Ê Fully open the load plate.

Page 228: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

228 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

Figure 155: Removing the processor

Ê Carefully remove the processor from its socket in a vertical motion.

V CAUTION!

Be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the processor socket.

Ê Thoroughly clean residual thermal paste from the processor surface using a lint-free cloth.

Ê If the processor is being replaced during a CPU upgrade and may be reused later, store it in a save place.

V CAUTION!

Processors are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge and must be handled with care. After a processor has been removed from its protective sleeve or from its socket, place it upside down on a nonconducting, antistatic surface. Never push a processor over a surface.

Page 229: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 229

Processors

11.3.4 Installing the new processor

Ê Remove the protective cap from the bottom side of the processor.

Figure 156: Installing the processor

Ê Hold the processor with your thumb and index finger.

Ê Make sure that the four notches on the processor align with the posts on the socket (see close-up).

Ê Lower the processor straight down without tilting or sliding it in the socket.

V CAUTION!

– Ensure that the processor is level in the socket.– Be careful not to touch or bend the pins on the processor socket.– Never touch the underside of the processor. Even minor soiling

such as grease from the skin can impair the processor’s operation or destroy the processor.

– Ensure not to scrape or dent the processor edges.

Page 230: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

230 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

Figure 157: Closing the load plate

Ê Carefully lower the load plate over the processor.

V CAUTION!

Always replace the socket cover if you remove the processor from the socket!

Figure 158: Closing socket release lever 2

Ê Fully close and hold shut the load plate.

Ê Close the socket release lever marked Close 1st (1) and latch it under the load plate retention tab to lock down the load plate (2).

Page 231: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 231

Processors

Figure 159: Closing socket release lever 1

Ê Close the socket release lever marked Open 1st (1) and latch it under the load plate retention tab (2).

11.3.5 Applying the thermal paste to the processor surface

I – For the Japanese market, the service engineer must follow the instruction provided separately.

– If the processor replacement kit contains a new heat sink, a thin layer of thermal compound has already been pre-applied to its lower surface. In this case, please proceed with section "Installing the heat sink" on page 233.

Page 232: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

232 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

Figure 160: Thermal paste syringe

One thermal compound syringe (FTS-FSP:P304000004) contains thermal paste for three processors.

Figure 161: Applying the thermal paste

Ê Apply a small point-shaped amount of thermal paste (1.0 gram, see description above) to the center of the processor surface as shown.

V CAUTION!

Do not mix different types of thermal paste.

Page 233: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 233

Processors

11.3.6 Installing the heat sink

I Processors with 135W need dedicated heat sinks (part number V26898-B964-V3).

Figure 162: Installing the heat sink

Ê Align the heat sink and fit it on the processor socket.

Ê Position the screws in the holes carefully, making sure they are upright.

V CAUTION!

– Ensure that the screws on the heat sink are properly seated on the threaded holes.

– Ensure that the heat sink cooling fins match the direction of the airflow (see airflow label)!

Ê Fasten it in a crossover pattern with four screws according to the numbering (torque 1.0 Nm, the description of this torque value doesn't apply to the Japanese market.)

Page 234: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

234 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

11.3.7 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 71

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

I When the system is powered on after a CPU has been replaced or upgraded, the Global Error indicator will start flashing with the error message CPU has been changed. This only indicates that the CPU configuration has been altered. There is no technical problem.

In order to turn off the Global Error indicator, please proceed as follows:

Ê Restart the system and wait for screen output to appear.

Ê Press the [F2] function key to enter the BIOS.If assigned, enter the BIOS password and press [Enter].

Ê In the Save & Exit menu, select Save Changes and Exit or Save Changes and Reset.

Ê Ensure that the Global Error indicator has stopped flashing.

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

11.4 Replacing a heat sink

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Page 235: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 235

Processors

11.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

11.4.2 Removing the defective heat sink

Ê Remove the heat sink as described in section "Removing the heat sink" on page 225.

Ê Remove the residual thermal paste from the processor surface.

Ê Clean the processor surface using a lint-free cloth.

11.4.3 Installing the new heat sink

I Processors with 135W need dedicated heat sinks (part number V26898-B964-V3).

Ê Install the heat sink as described in section "Installing the heat sink" on page 221.

11.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Page 236: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

236 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Processors

Page 237: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 237

12 Optical disk drive

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

● Before installing/removing an accessible drive to/from the server, turn off the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also unplug all power cables from the outlet. Failure to do so can cause electric shock.

● When installing an accessible drive, hold it by the side. Applying force to the top may cause failures.

● Do not touch the circuitry on boards and soldered parts. Hold the metallic areas or the edge of the circuit boards.

● The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Before handling them, first touch a metal part on the server to discharge static electricity from your body.

● Before installing an internal accessible drive, see the manual for the accessible drive.

● When forcing an accessible drive into a server, be careful so as not to pinch the cable etc. connected to an accessible drive.

● For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

12.1 Basic information

In configurations with up to four HDD/SSD modules a 5.25-inch slimline optical disk drive (ODD) can be installed in the right bottom side bay (see figure 254 on page 329).

Page 238: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

238 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Optical disk drive

12.2 Installing the ODD

12.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

12.2.2 Removing the dummy module

Figure 163: Removing the dummy module

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 239: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 239

Optical disk drive

Ê Press the lock in direction of the arrow until it disengages (1).

Ê Push the dummy module out of the bay (2).

Figure 164: Removing the dummy out of the mounting frame

Ê Pull the mounting frame outward on both sides (1).

Ensure that the pins on the mounting frame disengage with the screw holes on the dummy (see circles).

Ê Remove the dummy (2).

V CAUTION!

Keep the dummy for future use. If you remove the accessible drive again and do not replace it with a new one, the dummy must be reinstalled to comply with EMC regulations and to satisfy cooling requirements and fire protection measures.

Page 240: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

240 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Optical disk drive

12.2.3 Installing the ODD

Figure 165: Installing the ODD in the mounting frame

Ê Insert the ODD in the mounting frame.

Ensure that the four pins on the mounting frame engage with the screw holes on the ODD and fix them in this position.

Figure 166: Installing the ODD

Ê Push the ODD into the bay until it clicks in.

Page 241: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 241

Optical disk drive

12.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

12.3 Removing the ODD

12.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 66

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 242: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

242 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Optical disk drive

12.3.2 Removing the ODD

Figure 167: Removing the ODD

Ê Press the lock in direction of the arrow until it disengages (1).

Ê Push the ODD out of the bay (2).

Figure 168: Removing the ODD out of the mounting frame

Ê Pull the mounting frame outward on both sides (1).

Page 243: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 243

Optical disk drive

Ensure that the pins on the mounting frame disengage with the screw holes on the ODD.

Ê Remove the ODD (2).

12.3.3 Installing the dummy module

Figure 169: Installing the dummy in the mounting frame

Ê Insert the dummy in the mounting frame.

Ensure that the pins on the mounting frame engage with the screw holes on the dummy and fix them in this position (see circles).

Figure 170: Installing the dummy module

Ê Push the dummy module inward until it engages.

Page 244: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

244 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Optical disk drive

12.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Ê "Verifying and configuring the backup software solution" on page 76

12.4 Replacing the ODD

12.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 66

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

12.4.2 Removing the defective ODD

Ê Remove the ODD as described in section "Removing the ODD" on page 242.

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 245: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 245

Optical disk drive

12.4.3 Installing the new ODD

Ê Install the ODD as described in section "Installing the ODD" on page 240.

12.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 246: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

246 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Optical disk drive

Page 247: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 247

13 Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

13.1 Basic information

– Front VGA/LAN module

The front VGA/LAN module offers a VGA connector and/or a LAN connector on the front side of the server.

The LAN connector can be used as LAN management connector.

The customer can order the options front VGA and front LAN both or separately.

– Front panel

The front panel module consists of the front panel board, a front panel and a holder. These components are already pre-assembled.

The PRIMERGY RX200 S8 server’s chassis ID is stored on both the front panel board and the system board. After replacing the front panel module, it is necessary to program the ChassisID prom of the front panel board.

Beside the CPU temperature sensor and housing temperature sensor provided on the system board, an ambient temperature sensor is also included on the front panel board. In case of a defective ambient temperature sensor, please replace the front panel module.

Page 248: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

248 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

13.2 Installing the front VGA and/or front LAN

13.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

13.2.2 Removing the front VGA/LAN module

Figure 171: Removing the front VGA/LAN module

Ê Lift up the green touch point (1).

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 249: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 249

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Ê Pull the front VGA/LAN module out of the bay (2).

13.2.3 Removing the covers

Figure 172: Removing the covers

Ê Break out the cover for the front VGA connector (A) and/or front LAN connector (B).

13.2.4 Installing the front connectors

Installing the front VGA connector

Figure 173: Inserting the front VGA connector

Ê Insert the front VGA connector from the inside.

Page 250: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

250 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 174: Fastening the front VGA connector

Ê Fasten the front VGA connector with the two screws (see circles).

Ê Store the front VGA cable in the guidings (A).

Installing the front LAN connector

Ê Turn the front VGA/LAN module around.

Figure 175: Inserting the front LAN connector

Ê Thread the front LAN connector through the opening.

Page 251: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 251

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 176: Pushing down the front LAN connector

Ê Push the front LAN connector down.

Figure 177: Pushing frontward the front LAN connector

Ê Push the front LAN connector to the front side until the hooks engage (see close-up).

Ê Turn the front VGA/LAN module around.

Page 252: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

252 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 178: Storing the front LAN cable

Ê Store the front LAN cable in the guidings (A).

13.2.5 Installing the front VGA/LAN module

Figure 179: Installing the front VGA/LAN module

Ê Thread the free ends of the cables through the bay.

Page 253: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 253

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Ê Push the front VGA/LAN module into the bay from the front (1) until the locking mechanism engages (2).

13.2.6 Connecting the front VGA cable

Figure 180: Connecting the front VGA cable

Ê Route the front VGA cable as shown in the photo.

Ê Connect the front VGA cable to the system board connector "FRONT VGA".

13.2.7 Connecting the front LAN cable

I The front LAN card is already mounted in its holder.

Figure 181: Connecting the front LAN cable to the front LAN card

Ê Connect the front LAN cable to the front LAN card.

Page 254: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

254 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 182: Installing the front LAN card

Ê Carefully press the front LAN card with its holder into the "FRONT LAN M" slot until it clicks into place (see circle).

Figure 183: Routing the front LAN cable

Ê Route the front LAN cable in a loop as shown in the figure.

13.2.8 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Page 255: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 255

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

13.2.9 Using the front management LAN connector

In order to use the front management LAN connector to access the iRMC S4 management controller, please proceed as follows:

Ê Ensure that Management LAN has been enabled in the BIOS:

Ê Enter the BIOS.

Ê Select the Server Mgmt menu.

Ê Under iRMC LAN Parameters Configuration, make sure that the Management LAN setting is set to Enabled.

Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I The front management LAN connector can be used to access the iRMC S4 with either of the Management LAN Port settings enabled, Management or Shared.

For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Ê Connect a client computer (e.g. notebook) to the front management LAN connector.

I It is not possible to simultaneously access the iRMC S4 from the front and rear management LAN connectors. As soon as a LAN cable is connected to the front management LAN connector, the iRMC S4 cannot be accessed via the rear management LAN connector.

After removing the LAN cable from the front management LAN connector, the iRMC S4 will immediately become accessible via the rear management LAN connector again.

Ê Accessing the iRMC S4 using the front management LAN connector is only possible via the preset IP address 192.168.1.1 and cannot be configured otherwise.

Configure your client computer to use any static IP address on subnet 192.168.1.x (except 192.168.1.1) with subnet mask 255.255.255.0.

Page 256: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

256 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

13.3 Removing the front VGA and/or front LAN

13.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

13.3.2 Disconnecting the front LAN cable

Figure 184: Removing the front LAN card

Ê Press the two sides of the holder together (1) until the locking mechanism disengages.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 257: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 257

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Ê Carefully pull the holder with the front LAN card out of its slot (2).

Figure 185: Disconnecting the front LAN cable from the front LAN card

Ê Disconnect the front LAN cable from the front LAN card.

13.3.3 Disconnecting the front VGA cable

Figure 186: Disconnecting the front VGA cable

Ê Disconnect the front VGA cable from the system board connector "FRONT VGA".

Page 258: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

258 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

13.3.4 Removing the front VGA/LAN module

Ê Remove the front VGA/LAN module as described in section "Removing the front VGA/LAN module" on page 248.

13.3.5 Removing the front connectors

Removing the front LAN connector

Figure 187: Taking out the front LAN cable

Ê Take the front LAN cable out of the guidings (A).

Ê Turn the front VGA/LAN module around.

Page 259: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 259

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 188: Pushing inward the front LAN connector

Ê Disengage the hooks (1) and simultaneously push the front LAN connector inward (2).

Figure 189: Pushing upward the front LAN connector

Ê Push the front LAN connector upward.

Page 260: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

260 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 190: Removing the front LAN connector

Ê Thread the front LAN connector through the opening and remove it.

Ê Turn the front VGA/LAN module around.

Removing the front VGA connector

Figure 191: Loosening the front VGA connector

Ê Take the front VGA cable out of the guidings (A).

Ê Remove the two screws (see circles).

Page 261: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 261

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 192: Removing the front VGA connector

Ê Push the front VGA connector inside and remove it.

13.3.6 Installing the front VGA/LAN module

Ê Install the front VGA/LAN module as described in section "Installing the front VGA/LAN module" on page 252.

13.3.7 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 262: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

262 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

13.4 Replacing the front VGA and/or front LAN cable

13.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

13.4.2 Removing the defective front VGA and/or front LAN cable

Ê Disconnect the front LAN cable as described in section "Disconnecting the front LAN cable" on page 256.

Ê Disconnect the front VGA cable as described in section "Disconnecting the front VGA cable" on page 257.

Ê Remove the front VGA/LAN module as described in section "Removing the front VGA/LAN module" on page 248.

Ê Remove the front LAN and/or front VGA connector as described in section "Removing the front connectors" on page 258.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 263: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 263

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

13.4.3 Installing the new front VGA and/or front LAN cable

Ê Install the front LAN and/or front VGA connector as described in section "Installing the front connectors" on page 249.

Ê Install the front VGA/LAN module as described in section "Removing the front VGA/LAN module" on page 248.

Ê Connect the front VGA cable as described in section "Connecting the front VGA cable" on page 253.

Ê Connect the front LAN cable as described in section "Connecting the front LAN cable" on page 253.

13.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

13.5 Replacing the front LAN card

13.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 264: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

264 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

13.5.2 Removing the defective front LAN card

Ê Disconnect the front LAN cable as described in section "Disconnecting the front LAN cable" on page 256.

13.5.3 Installing the new front LAN card

Ê Connect the front LAN cable as described in section "Connecting the front LAN cable" on page 253.

13.5.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 83

Ê "Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 86

Ê "Configuring LAN teaming" on page 88

Page 265: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 265

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

13.6 Replacing the front panel board

Note on system information backup / restore

I The front panel board contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains system information like server name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored from the front panel board to the new system board.

V CAUTION!

For that reason the front panel board and system board must not be replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration data on the system board would fail.

13.6.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Locating the defective component" on page 45

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutesSoftware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

Page 266: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

266 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

13.6.2 Removing the defective front panel board

Figure 193: Disconnecting the front panel cable

Ê Disconnect the front panel cable from the system board connector "Front Panel".

Ê Take the front panel cable out of the guiding (A).

Ê If applicable, disconnect the front LAN cable as described in section "Disconnecting the front LAN cable" on page 256.

Ê If applicable, disconnect the front VGA cable as described in section "Disconnecting the front VGA cable" on page 257.

A

Page 267: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 267

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 194: Removing the ID card and screw

Ê Remove the ID card (1).

Ê Remove the screw (2).

Figure 195: Removing the front panel module

Ê Push the front panel module frontward out of the bay.

Page 268: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

268 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Ê Thread all cables through the opening.

Figure 196: Removing the front VGA/LAN module

Ê Lift up the green touch point (1).

Ê Push the front VGA/LAN module frontward out of the bay (2).

Figure 197: Disconnecting the front panel cable

Ê Open the cable clamp, if applicable (1).

Ê Disconnect the front panel cable (2).

Page 269: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 269

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 198: Removing the front panel frame

Ê Press the lock inside (1).

Ê Swivel the front panel frame outward (2).

Ê Unhook the front panel frame on the left side (3) and remove it.

Figure 199: Removing the front panel board

Ê Remove the two screws (1).

Ê Remove the front panel board from the frame (2).

Page 270: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

270 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

13.6.3 Installing the new front panel module

Figure 200: Position pins and nose

Figure 201: Installing the front panel board

Ê Position the front panel board on the frame regarding the pins and the nose (1).

Ê Fasten the front panel board to the frame with the two screws (2).

Page 271: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 271

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 202: Installing the front panel frame

Ê Hook the front panel frame in on the left side (1).

Ê Swivel the front panel frame inward (2) until the lock clicks in (3).

Figure 203: Connecting the front panel cable

Ê Connect the front panel cable (1).

Ê Close the cable clamp, if applicable (2).

Page 272: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

272 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 204: Installing the front VGA/LAN module

Ê Push the front VGA/LAN module into the bay.

Figure 205: Installing the front panel module

Ê Thread all cables through the opening.

Ê Push the front panel module into the bay.

Page 273: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 273

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Figure 206: Inserting screw and ID card

Ê Fasten the front panel module with the screw (1).

Ê Insert the ID card (2).

Figure 207: Connecting the front panel cable

Ê Store the front panel cable under the guiding (A).

A

Page 274: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

274 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Front panel and front VGA/LAN module

Ê Connect the front panel cable to the system board connector "Front Panel".

Ê If applicable, connect the front VGA cable as described in section "Connecting the front VGA cable" on page 253.

Ê If applicable, connect the front LAN cable as described in section "Connecting the front LAN cable" on page 253.

13.6.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool" on page 87

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 73

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 275: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 275

14 Serial interface

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

For further safety information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

14.1 Basic information

The serial interface can be installed in the slot cover of riser module 1 (slot 1) or in the slot cover of riser module 2 (slot 2).

14.2 Installing the serial interface

Figure 208: Serial interface kit

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

1 Long slot bracket

I The long slot bracket is not used in this server.

2 Serial interface with short slot bracket

Page 276: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

276 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Serial interface

14.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

14.2.2 Removing the slot cover

Ê Remove the riser module 1 or the riser module2 as described in section "Handling riser modules" on page 58.

Ê Remove the slot cover of slot 1 or slot 2 as described in section "Removing the slot cover - slot 1-3" on page 155.

14.2.3 Installing the serial interface

Figure 209: Installing the serial interface - slot 1

Ê Install the serial interface in slot 1 or slot 2.

Ê Install the riser module 1 or the riser module2 as described in section "Handling riser modules" on page 58.

Page 277: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 277

Serial interface

Figure 210: Connecting the serial interface cable

Ê Connect the serial interface cable to the system board connector "SERIAL 1".

14.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 278: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

278 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Serial interface

14.3 Removing the serial interface

14.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

14.3.2 Removing the serial interface

Figure 211: Disconnecting the serial interface cable

Ê Disconnect the serial interface cable from the system board connector "SERIAL 1".

Ê Remove the riser module 1 or the riser module2 as described in section "Handling riser modules" on page 58.

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 279: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 279

Serial interface

Figure 212: Removing the serial interface - slot 1

Ê Remove the serial interface from slot 1 or slot 2.

14.3.3 Installing the slot cover

Ê Install the slot cover of slot 1 or slot 2 as described in section "Installing the slot cover - slot 1-3" on page 163.

Ê Install the riser module 1 or the riser module2 as described in section "Handling riser modules" on page 58.

14.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 280: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

280 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Serial interface

14.4 Replacing the serial interface

14.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

14.4.2 Removing the defective serial interface

Ê Remove the serial interface as described in section "Removing the serial interface" on page 278.

14.4.3 Installing the new serial interface

Ê Install the serial interface as described in section "Installing the serial interface" on page 276.

14.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 281: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 281

15 System board and components

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

● Devices and components inside the server remain hot after shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to cool down before installing or removing internal options.

● Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up (e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-sensitive devices (ESDs).

● Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit boards by their metallic areas or edges.

● For further information, please refer to chapter "Important information" on page 31.

15.1 Basic information

This section provides instructions for the system board and the following components:

● CMOS memory (volatile BIOS memory) and the real-time clock are powered by a lithium coin cell (CMOS battery). This cell lasts up to ten years, depending on ambient temperature and use.

If the CMOS battery is depleted or falls below minimum voltage levels, it need to be replaced immediately.

● UFM (USB Flash Module)

The server can be equipped with a USB Flash Module (UFM).

● TPM (Trusted Platform Module)

The system board is optionally equipped with a Trusted Platform Module (TPM). This module enables programs from third party manufacturers to store key information, for example drive encryption using Windows Bitlocker Drive Encryption.

Page 282: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

282 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

● Onboard SAS enabling key

The onboard SAS enabling key enables the SAS functionality of the Onboard controller.

15.2 Replacing the CMOS battery

Safety notes

V CAUTION!

● The CMOS battery must be replaced with an identical battery or with a battery type recommended by the manufacturer.

● Keep lithium batteries away from children.

● Do not throw batteries into the trash can. Lithium batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

● For further safety information, please refer to section "Environmental protection" in the PRIMERGY RX200 S8 Operating Manual.

● Ensure to insert the CMOS battery with the positive pole facing up!

15.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less; recommended: tooth pick

Page 283: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 283

System board and components

15.2.2 Replacing the defective CMOS battery

Figure 213: Replacing the CMOS battery

Ê Press the locking spring into direction of the arrow (1), so that the CMOS battery jumps out of its socket.

Ê Remove the CMOS battery (2).

V CAUTION!

Sharp tools such as screw drivers might damage system board components in case of slipping.

If the CMOS battery cannot be ejected without the help of a tool, it is recommended to use a tooth pick.

Ê Insert a new CMOS battery of the same type into the socket (3) and (4).

15.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê Dispose of the CMOS battery in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 73

Ê "Verifying the system time settings" on page 80

1

23

4

Page 284: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

284 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

15.3 USB Flash Module (UFM)

15.3.1 Installing the UFM

15.3.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

15.3.1.2 Installing the UFM

Figure 214: UFM installation kit

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 5 minutesSoftware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

1 USB Flash Module (UFM) 3 UFM spacer

2 UFM nylon screw

Page 285: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 285

System board and components

Figure 215: Position on the system board

Figure 216: Installing the UFM

Ê Connect the UFM to the system board. The UFM spacer must click into the hole on the system board.

15.3.1.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 286: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

286 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

15.3.1.4 Software configuration

The UFM delivery set includes the "Recovery Tool CD" to setup the ESXi configuration. Proceed as follows:

Ê Switch on the server.

Ê Right after switching on the server, insert the "Recovery Tool CD" into the DVD drive and close the drive tray.

Ê The server should now boot from the "Recovery Tool CD".

Ê Follow the on-screen instructions.

15.3.2 Removing the UFM

15.3.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver– combination pliers and flat nose pliers

Page 287: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 287

System board and components

15.3.2.2 Removing the UFM

Figure 217: Removing the UFM

Ê Remove the nylon screw of the UFM (1).

Ê Disconnect and remove the UFM (2).

Figure 218: Remaining UFM spacer

The UFM spacer remains on the system board.

V CAUTION!

UFM contains customer information (e.g. IP address, License etc.). After replacing the UFM, you must pass the defective UFM to the customer, and ask for disposal. If the disposal of the defective UFM is requested by the customer, you break it according to the following procedure, and dispose it.

Page 288: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

288 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

Figure 219: Tools for breaking the UFM

Figure 220: UFM breaking method

Ê Use a long nose pliers and a combination pliers to break the UFM in half as shown in the figure.

15.3.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Page 289: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 289

System board and components

15.3.3 Replacing the UFM

15.3.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 3" on page 60

15.3.3.2 Removing the defective UFM

Ê Remove the UFM as described in section "Removing the UFM" on page 287.

Ê The UFM spacer remains on the system board.

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 5 minutesSoftware: 5 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver– combination pliers and flat nose pliers

Page 290: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

290 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

15.3.3.3 Installing the new UFM

Figure 221: Removing the UFM spacer

Ê Remove the nylon screw from the UFM (1).

Ê Remove the UFM spacer (2).

Figure 222: Installing the UFM

Ê Connect the UFM to the system board and the remaining UFM spacer (1).

Ê Fasten the UFM to the UFM spacer with the nylon screw (2).

15.3.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 3" on page 61

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Page 291: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 291

System board and components

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

15.3.3.5 Software configuration

The UFM delivery set includes the "Recovery Tool CD" to setup the ESXi configuration. Proceed as follows:

Ê Switch on the server.

Ê Right after switching on the server, insert the "Recovery Tool CD" into the DVD drive and close the drive tray.

Ê The server should now boot from the "Recovery Tool CD".

Ê Follow the on-screen instructions.

15.4 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

15.4.1 Installing the TPM

15.4.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 5 minutesSoftware: 5 minutes

Tools: – Bit screw driver– TPM bit insert (*)

(*) For the Japanese market:

– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)

Page 292: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

292 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the riser module 1" on page 58

15.4.1.2 Installing the TPM

Figure 223: TPM installation kit

Figure 224: Position on the system board

1 TPM (Trusted Platform Module) 3 Special screw for TPM

2 TPM spacer

I The black TPM spacer is not used in this server.

4 TPM bit insert for TPM special screw

Page 293: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 293

System board and components

Figure 225: Inserting the TPM spacer on the system board

Ê Insert the TPM spacer into the hole on the system board.

Figure 226: TPM bit insert

Ê Attach the TPM bit insert or TPM module fixing tool (Japanese market) to a bit screw driver.

Page 294: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

294 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

Figure 227: Installing the TPM

Ê Connect the TPM to the system board (1).

Ê Fasten the TPM with the special screw for the TPM using the TPM bit insert or TPM module fixing tool (Japanese market) (2).

V CAUTION!

Do not fasten the screw too firmly. Stop it by extent where the head of the screw lightly touches the TPM (torque value of 0.6 Nm).

15.4.1.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the riser module 1" on page 59

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê Enable TPM in the system board BIOS. Proceed as follows:

Ê Switch on or restart your server.

Ê As soon as the startup screen appears, press the [F2] function key to enter the BIOS.

Ê Select the Advanced menu.

Ê Select the Trusted Computing submenu.

Ê Set the TPM Support and TPM State settings to Enabled.

Ê Under Pending TPM operation, select the desired TPM operation mode.

Page 295: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 295

System board and components

Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

15.4.2 Removing the TPM

V CAUTION!

Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored/re-saved by the customer. After installing a new system board, the TPM must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.

If the contact persons DO NOT have a backup copy available, inform them that removing the TPM will cause to lose all data.

15.4.2.1 Preliminary steps

Before removing the TPM, perform the following steps.

Ê Before removing the TPM board, it is necessary to remove BitLocker-protection from the computer and to decrypt the volume.

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 30 minutes

Tools: Removing the system board:

– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Removing the TPM:

– Bit screw driver– TPM bit insert (*)

(*) For the Japanese market:

– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)

Page 296: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

296 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

Ask the system administrator to turn off BitLocker-protection using the BitLocker setup wizard available either from the Control Panel or Windows Explorer:

Ê Open Bitlocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking Bitlocker Drive Encryption.

I Administrator permission required If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.

Ê To turn off BitLocker and decrypt the volume, click Turn Off BitLocker, and then click Decrypt the volume.

I Decrypting the volume may be time-consuming. By decrypting the volume, all of the information stored on that computer is decrypted.

For further information on how to disable BitLocker drive encryption, please refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base.

Fujitsu service partners will find additional information (also available in Japanese) on the Fujitsu Extranet web pages.

Ê Disable TPM in the system board BIOS. Proceed as follows:

Ê Switch on or restart your server.

Ê As soon as the startup screen appears, press the [F2] function key to enter the BIOS.

Ê Select the Advanced menu.

Ê Select the Trusted Computing submenu.

Ê Set the TPM Support and TPM State settings to Disabled.

Ê Save your changes and exit the BIOS.

I For detailed information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Page 297: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 297

System board and components

15.4.2.2 Removing the TPM

Ê "Removing the defective system board" on page 313

Ê Lay the system board on a soft, antistatic surface with its component side facing down.

Figure 228: Removing the TPM screw

Ê Locate the slotted lower end of the TPM screw (1).

Ê Carefully loosen the TPM screw using a thin slotted screw driver (e.g. watchmaker's screw driver) or the dedicated TPM screw driver (Japanese market) (2).

V CAUTION!

Ensure to turn the screw clockwise in order to remove it!

Slowly and carefully increase the pressure on the screw until it begins to turn. The effort when loosing the screw should be as low as possible.

Otherwise the thin metal bar may break, rendering it impossible to loosen the screw.

Ê Remove the TPM screw (3).

Ê Remove the defective TPM on the upper side of the system board.

Page 298: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

298 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

Figure 229: Removing the TPM spacer

Ê Using a small pair of combination pliers, press together the hooks on the TPM spacer (1, see close-up) and remove it from the system board (2).

I If the TPM is to be replaced, the TPM spacer may remain on the system board.

15.4.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the new system board" on page 316

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Page 299: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 299

System board and components

15.4.3 Replacing the TPM

V CAUTION!

Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored/re-saved by the customer. After installing a new system board, the TPM must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.

If the contact persons DO NOT have a backup copy available, inform them that replacing the TPM board will cause to lose all data.

15.4.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 30 minutes

Tools: Removing the system board:

– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Replacing the TPM:

– Bit screw driver– TPM bit insert (*)

– thin slotted screw driver (2 x 0.4 mm) (*)

(*) For the Japanese market:

– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)

Page 300: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

300 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

15.4.3.2 Removing the defective TPM

Ê Remove the TPM as described in section "Removing the TPM" on page 295.

Ê Leave the TPM spacer on the system board when removing the defective TPM.

15.4.3.3 Installing the new TPM

Figure 230: TPM spacer

I The TPM spacer is already present on the system board.

Ê Install the TPM as described in section "Installing the TPM" on page 292.

15.4.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê Reinstall the system board as described in section "Installing the new system board" on page 316.

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

I You can find information on configuring the TPM in the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Page 301: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 301

System board and components

15.5 Onboard SAS enabling key

15.5.1 Installing the onboard SAS enabling key

15.5.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

15.5.1.2 Installing the onboard SAS enabling key

Figure 231: Onboard SAS enabling key

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 302: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

302 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

Figure 232: Position onboard SAS enabling key

Figure 233: Installing the onboard SAS enabling key

Ê Connect the onboard SAS enabling key to the connector "SKU KEY" on the system board.

15.5.1.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 73

Page 303: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 303

System board and components

15.5.2 Removing the onboard SAS enabling key

15.5.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

15.5.2.2 Removing the onboard SAS enabling key

Figure 234: Removing the onboard SAS enabling key

Ê Firmly pull up on the release lash until the onboard SAS enabling key pops out of its connector.

15.5.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 304: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

304 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 73

15.5.3 Replacing the onboard SAS enabling key

15.5.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

15.5.3.2 Replacing the onboard SAS enabling key

Ê Remove the defective onboard SAS enabling key as described in section "Removing the onboard SAS enabling key" on page 303.

Ê Install the new onboard SAS enabling key as described in section "Installing the onboard SAS enabling key" on page 301.

15.5.3.3 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 305: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 305

System board and components

15.6 iRMC microSD card

I The iRMC microSD card is necessary for using the embedded Lifecycle Management (eLCM) functionality of the iRMC. It requires a valid eLCM license key, which is always purchased together with the iRMC microSD card and activated through the iRMC web frontend.

For further information, please refer to the “ServerView embedded Lifecycle Management (eLCM)” user guide.

15.6.1 Installing the iRMC microSD card

15.6.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê If applicable "Removing an expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 161

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Average task duration:5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 306: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

306 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

15.6.1.2 Installing the iRMC microSD card

Figure 235: iRMC microSD card

Figure 236: Installing the iRMC microSD card

Ê With the label facing up, insert the iRMC microSD card into the microSD card slot (1) as far as it will go (2).

I The onboard position of the microSD card slot can be found in section "Connectors and indicators on the system board" on page 333.

Page 307: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 307

System board and components

15.6.1.3 Concluding steps

Ê If applicable, "Installing an expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 154

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

15.6.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card

15.6.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê If applicable "Removing an expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 161

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Average task duration:5 minutes

Tools: Side-cutting pliers

Page 308: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

308 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

15.6.2.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card

Figure 237: Removing the iRMC microSD card

Ê To eject the iRMC microSD card, gently push it in and then let go (1).

Ê Pull the iRMC microSD card straight out of its slot (2).

Destroying the defective iRMC microSD card

V CAUTION!

The iRMC microSD card contains customer information. After replacing the iRMC microSD card, hand the defective card over to the customer. If the customer requests disposal of the defective iRMC microSD card, proceed as follows:

Ê Using a pair of side-cutting pliers, cut the iRMC microSD card in half.

15.6.2.3 Concluding steps

Ê If applicable, "Installing an expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 154

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Page 309: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 309

System board and components

15.6.3 Replacing the iRMC microSD card

15.6.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê If applicable "Removing an expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 161

15.6.3.2 Replacing the iRMC microSD card

Ê Remove the defective iRMC microSD card as described in section "Removing the iRMC microSD card" on page 307.

Ê Install the new iRMC microSD card as described in section "Installing the iRMC microSD card" on page 305.

15.6.3.3 Concluding steps

Ê If applicable, "Installing an expansion card - slot 1-3" on page 154

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Upgrade and Repair Unit(URU)

Average task duration:5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

Page 310: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

310 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

15.7 Replacing the system board

Note on TPM

I The system board can be equipped with an optional TPM (Trusted Platform Module). This module enables third party programs to store key information (e. g. drive encryption using Windows Bitlocker Drive Encryption).

If the customer is using TPM functionality, the TPM has to be removed from the defective system board and connected to the new system board. For a detailed description, please refer to section "Replacing the TPM" on page 299.

The TPM is activated in the system BIOS.

V CAUTION!

– Before replacing the system board, ask the customer whether TPM functionality is used.

Field Replaceable Unit(FRU)

Hardware: 40 minutesSoftware: 10 minutes

Tools: Replacing the system board:

– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

– Magnifying glass for inspecting processor socket springs (recommended)

Replacing the TPM:

– Bit screw driver– TPM bit insert (*)

– thin slotted screw driver (2 x 0.4 mm) (*)

(*) For the Japanese market:

– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)

If an UFM is installed:

– Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

Page 311: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 311

System board and components

– If the customer is using TPM functionality, remove the TPM from the old system board and install it on the new system board.

Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with TPM backup copies. For security reasons, the TPM must be restored / re-saved by the customer. After installing a new system board the TPM must be enabled. You may not clear the TPM data.

If the contact persons DO NOT have a backup copy available, inform them that replacing the TPM board will cause to lose all data.

Note on system information backup / restore

I The front panel board contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains system information like server name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID EPROM. After replacing the system board the backup data is restored from the front panel board to the new system board.

V CAUTION!

For that reason the front panel board and system board must not be replaced simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration data on the system board would fail.

Note on network settings recovery

I When replacing network controllers or the system board, network configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming configurations.

Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a network controller or the system board.

Page 312: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

312 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

15.7.1 Preliminary steps

Ê "Locating the defective server" on page 43

Ê "Note on network settings recovery" on page 311

Ê "Disabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 64

Ê "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 63

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê Disconnect all external cables.

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 47

Ê "Removing the air duct" on page 62

Ê Remove all memory modules, see section "Removing a memory module" on page 209.

I Before removing the memory modules, take a note on the installation slot number for each memory module. Make sure that you reinstall the memory modules in the slot they were located before the replacement.

Ê Remove all heat sinks, see section "Removing the heat sink" on page 225.

Ê Remove all expansion cards, see section "Expansion cards and riser cards" on page 154.

I Before removing the expansion cards, take a note on the installation slot number for each card. Make sure that you reinstall the card in the slot it was located before the replacement.

Ê "Removing the defective front LAN card" on page 264 (if applicable)

Ê "Removing the UFM" on page 287 (if applicable)

I Remove the UFM spacer from the defective system board and fasten it with the UFM screw to the UFM board.

Ê "Replacing the onboard SAS enabling key" on page 304 (if applicable)

Ê Remove all fan modules, see section "Removing the defective fan module" on page 135.

I Check if all fan modules are uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original bays.

Page 313: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 313

System board and components

Ê Remove the iRMC microSD card (if applicable), see section "Removing the iRMC microSD card" on page 307.

15.7.2 Removing the defective system board

Ê Disconnect all cables from the system board.

Figure 238: Removing the fan cage

Ê Remove the four screws (1).

Ê Push the fan cage somewhat in direction of the arrow (2) to disengage the hooks (see close-up).

Ê Remove the fan cage upward (3).

Page 314: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

314 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

Figure 239: Removing the distance holder

Ê Remove the distance holder from the system board (see circle).

Figure 240: Position of the screws

Ê Remove the nine screws from the system board.

Page 315: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 315

System board and components

Figure 241: Removing the system board

Ê Use both hands to lift the system board carefully out of the chassis in a slight angle. Thereby you pull the connectors out of the connector panel.

V CAUTION!

Always take the system board with both hands!

Never lift the system board one-sided or at a heat sink, because the solder connections between the socket and the system board come under tension and increase the risk of damage and malfunction!

Don’t damage the EMI springs which are essential to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements and fire protection measures.

Ê Place the removed and the new system board on an antistatic surface.

Ê Remove the TPM as described in section "Removing the TPM" on page 295.

Ê Remove the processor as described in section "Removing the defective processor" on page 226.

Ê Remove the protective plastic cover from the processor socket of the new system board and fit it onto the socket of the defective system board which will be sent back to spares.

Page 316: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

316 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

I Returned system boards without this cover probably have to be scrapped.

15.7.3 Installing the new system board

Ê Install the processor as described in section "Installing the new processor" on page 229).

Ê Check the settings on the new system board (see section "Onboard settings" on page 343).

Ê Insert the system board by holding it at a slight angle. Slide the connectors into the connector panel (see figure 241 on page 315).

Ê Lower the system board carefully into the chassis.

Ê Adjust the system board. If necessary adjust the position of the system board with a gentle twisting motion.

I When the system board is in the right position, the centre rings engage with the holes indicated.

Ê Fasten the system board with the nine screws (see figure 240 on page 314).

Ê Install the distance holder (see figure 239 on page 314).

Page 317: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 317

System board and components

Figure 242: Installing the fan cage

Ê Insert the fan cage (1).

Ê Push the fan cage somewhat in direction of the arrow (2) to engage the hooks (see close-up).

Ê Fasten fan cage with the four screws (3).

Ê Reconnect all cables to the system board:

– Two power cables of power supply– Front panel cable– Power cable for HDD backplane– SATA cables for HDD backplane (if applicable)– SATA cable for ODD (if applicable)– Front VGA cable (if applicable)– I2C cable (HDD monitoring) (if applicable)

For the cable plan see section "Cabling" on page 322.

Page 318: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

318 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

15.7.4 Concluding steps

Ê "Installing the onboard SAS enabling key" on page 301 (if applicable)

Ê "Installing the TPM" on page 291 (if applicable)

Ê "Installing the UFM" on page 284 (if applicable)

Ê "Installing the iRMC microSD card" on page 305 (if applicable)

Ê Install all fan modules, see section "Installing the new fan module" on page 136.

I Make sure that you reinstall each fan module in the bay it was located before the replacement.

Ê Install all memory modules, see section "Installing a memory module" on page 207.

I Make sure that you reinstall each memory module in the slot it was located before the replacement.

Ê Install all heat sinks, see section "Installing the heat sink" on page 233.

Ê "Installing the new front LAN card" on page 264 (if applicable)

Ê Install all expansion cards see section "Expansion cards and riser cards" on page 154.

I Make sure that you reinstall each card in the slots it was located before the replacement.

Ê "Installing the air duct" on page 62

Ê "Reassembling" on page 52

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê Connect all external cables.

Ê "Updating or recovering the system board BIOS and iRMC" on page 71

Ê If applicable, activate TPM functionality in the system BIOS under Security > TPM (Security Chip) Setting > Security Chip. For more information, refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Ê "Verifying system information backup / restore" on page 73

Ê "Verifying the system time settings" on page 80

Ê "Looking up changed MAC / WWN addresses" on page 86

Page 319: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 319

System board and components

Ê "Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux environment" on page 83

Ê "Enabling SVOM boot watchdog functionality" on page 78

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

Ê "Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 84

Ê If applicable, reconfigure your network settings in the operation system according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion card or onboard).

I Configuration of network settings should be performed by the customer. For further information, please refer to section "Note on network settings recovery" on page 311

Ê If applicable, restore LAN teaming configurations as described in section "After replacing the system board" on page 89

Page 320: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

320 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

System board and components

Page 321: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 321

16 Cables

16.1 Overview cables

No. Part number Description From - to

1 A3C40137879 Front I/O cable System board to front panel

2 A3C40137878 or A3C40144322 (flat cable)

Mini SAS System board to backplane or SAS controller to backplane

3 A3C40140463 I2C cable (HDD monitoring)

System board to backplane

4 A3C40143425 Mini SAS SAS controller to 8x backplane

5 A3C40137880 HDD POWER CABLE System board to backplane

6 A3C40137881 SATA ODD CABLE System board and 4x BPL to ODD (cage)

7 T26139-Y3994-V101 VGA cable System board to front VGA

8 T26139-Y3987-V2 iBBU cable (550 mm)

iBBU to MegaRAID SAS 9280-8e controller

9 T26139-Y3987-V3 iBBU cable (16 cm) iBBU to RAID card D2616

10 T26139-Y4032-V3 FBU cable (17 cm) FBU to RAID card D3116

11 T26139-Y4032-V2 FBU cable (47 cm) FBU to MegaRAID SAS 9285CV-8e controller

12 S26361-F3120-V3 A3C40071727

Com port System board to slot

13 T26139-Y4015-V101 NCSI cable System board to modular LAN controller D2755

14 T26139-Y4025-V1 Front LAN Cable LAN module to front LAN

Page 322: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

322 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Cables

16.2 Cabling

Figure 243: Basic cabling

Figure 244: Basic cabling + Front VGA/LAN

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

FrontVGA/LAN

7

14

Page 323: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 323

Cables

Figure 245: Basic cabling + ODD + 4xHDD (onboard)

Figure 246: Basic cabling + ODD + 4xHDD + RAID card D2616

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

2

53

ODD6

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

53

ODD62RAID card

D2616

Page 324: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

324 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Cables

Figure 247: Basic cabling + ODD + 4xHDD + RAID card D2616+ iBBU

Figure 248: Basic cabling + 8xHDD + RAID card D2616 + iBBU

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

53

ODD6

iBBU9

2RAID card

D2616

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

5

32

iBBU9

4

RAID cardD2616

Page 325: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 325

Cables

Figure 249: Basic cabling + 8xHDD + RAID card D2616 + MegaRAID card 9280-8e + iBBU

Figure 250: Basic cabling + 8xHDD + RAID card D3116 + FBU

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

5

32

iBBU

4

8

RAID cardD2616

MegaRAID cardSAS 9280-8e

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

5

32

FBU10

4

RAID cardD3116

Page 326: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

326 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Cables

Figure 251: Basic cabling + 8xHDD + RAID card D3116 + MegaRAID card 9285CV-8e + FBU

Figure 252: Basic cabling + MegaRAID card 9285CV-8e in slot 2

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

5

32

FBU

4

11

RAID cardD3116

MegaRAID cardSAS 9285CV-8e

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

5

32

FBU

4

11

RAID cardD3116

MegaRAID cardSAS 9285CV-8e

Page 327: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 327

Cables

Figure 253: Basic cabling + RAID card D3116 + MegaRAID card 9285CV-8e + FBU + D2755

Front panel

PSU 1

PSU 2

PDB

1

5

32

FBU

4

11

-D275513

12

RAID cardD3116

MegaRAID cardSAS 9285CV-8e

Page 328: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

328 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Cables

Page 329: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 329

17 Appendix

17.1 Mechanical overview

17.1.1 Server front

Figure 254: Front side 4x 2.5-inch HDDs

Figure 255: Front side 8x 2.5-inch HDDs

Pos. Component

1 4x 2.5-inch hard disk drives / dummy modules

2 Front VGA/LAN module (option)

3 ID card

4 ODD (option) / dummy cover

5 Front panel and indicators

Pos. Component

1 8x 2.5-inch hard disk drives / dummy modules

2 Front VGA/LAN module

3 ID card

4 Front panel and indicators

Page 330: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

330 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Appendix

17.1.2 Server rear

Figure 256: Rear side

I PCIe slot 4 is located inside the housing.

Pos. Component

1 Up to 2 power supply units / dummy cover

2 PCIe slot 3

3 PCIe slot 2 (option)

4 PCIe slot 1

5 Connectors and indicators

Page 331: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 331

Appendix

17.1.3 Server interior

Figure 257: Interior (example: 4x 2.5-inch HDDs)

Pos. Component

1 Up to 2 power supply units

2 Riser module 1

3 Riser module 2

4 Riser module 3

5 CPU 1

6 Main memory CPU 1

7 CPU 2

8 Main memory CPU 2

9 Fan modules

10 4x 2.5-inch hard disk drives / dummy modules

11 Top side: front VGA/LAN module (option)Bottom side: ODD (option) / dummy cover

Page 332: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

332 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Appendix

Figure 258: Interior (example: 8x 2.5-inch HDDs)

Pos. Component

1 Up to 2 power supply units

2 Riser module 1

3 Riser module 2

4 Riser module 3

5 CPU 1

6 Main memory CPU 1

7 CPU 2

8 Main memory CPU 2

9 Fan modules

10 8x 2.5-inch hard disk drives / dummy modules

11 Top side: front VGA/LAN module (option)

Page 333: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 333

Appendix

17.2 Connectors and indicators

17.2.1 Connectors and indicators on the system board

17.2.1.1 Onboard connectors

Figure 259: Internal connectors of the system board D3302

iRMC

exte

rnal

con

nect

ors

INDICATECSS

TPM

LANCTRL

Battery

VGA

USB 2

USB 3

SharedLAN

LAN 2

ManagementLAN

Slot riser card / slot 2 and 3

CPU 2 DIMM 3F

CPU 2 DIMM 2F

CPU 2 DIMM 1E

CPU 2 DIMM 2E

CPU 2 DIMM 3E

CPU 2 DIMM 1F

CPU 2 DIMM 1G

CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 3H

CPU 2 DIMM 2H

CPU 2 DIMM 1H

CPU 2 DIMM 3G

PCH

CPU 1 DIMM 1A

CPU 1 DIMM 2A

CPU 1 DIMM 3B

CPU 1 DIMM 2B

CPU 1 DIMM 1B

CPU 1 DIMM 3A

CPU 1 DIMM 3D

CPU 1 DIMM 2D

CPU 1 DIMM 1C

CPU 1 DIMM 2C

CPU 1 DIMM 3C

CPU 1 DIMM 1D

1CN101J9

FAN

11/1

2

SYSSATA 1

SAS 1

SMB SAS

Front Panel

Front VGA

PWR 1

BP PWR

Front LAN M

CPU 2

CPU 1

FAN

9/10

SY

S

FAN

7/8

SYS

FAN

5/6

SYS

FAN

3/4

SYS

FAN

1/2

SYS

USB 1

Slot riser card / slot 1

Slot riser card / slot 4

Slot 3

Slot 2

UFM

PWR 2

SERIAL 1

1

NC-SI

SKU Key

USD

Page 334: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

334 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Appendix

No. Print Description

1 SKU Key Connector for onboard SAS enabling key

2 FRONT VGA Connector for optional front VGA

3 UFM Connector for optional USB Flash Module (UFM)

4 PWR 2 I2C connector for PSU

5 PWR 1 Power supply connector 12V

6 Front Panel Front panel connector

7 SATA 1 SATA HDD connector

8 FAN 11/12 SYS Power connector for system fans 11 and 12

9 SAS 1 SATA connector for optical drive

10 BP PWR Power connector for SAS/SATA backplane

11 FRONT LAN M Connector for optional front LAN card

12 SAS SMB LED signaling connector for SAS/SATA backplane

13 FAN 9/10 SYS Power connector for system fans 9 and 10

14 FAN 7/8 SYS Power connector for system fans 7 and 8

15 FAN 5/6 SYS Power connector for system fans 5 and 6

16 FAN 3/4 SYS Power connector for system fans 3 and 4

17 FAN 1/2 SYS Power connector for system fans 1 and 2

18 NC-SI Connector for NCSI cable

19 TPM Connector for optional TPM

20 USD 1 iRMC microSD card

21 SERIAL 1 Connector for optional serial interface

Page 335: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 335

Appendix

17.2.1.2 Onboard indicators and controls

Figure 260: Onboard indicators and Indicate CSS button

I LEDs A, B and C are visible from the outside on the server rear. All other LEDs are only visible if the server cover has been opened.

If the server has been powered off (power plugs disconnected) it is possible to indicate the failure states of fans, memory modules, controllers, battery and CPU by pressing the indicate CSS button.

No. Description

1 Indicate CSS button

iRMC

exte

rnal

con

nect

ors

INDICATECSS

TPM

LANCTRL

F

I

G

G

H

Battery

VGA

USB 2

USB 3

SharedLAN

LAN 2

ManagementLAN

Slot riser card / slot 2 and 3

CPU 2 DIMM 3F

CPU 2 DIMM 2F

CPU 2 DIMM 1E

CPU 2 DIMM 2E

CPU 2 DIMM 3E

CPU 2 DIMM 1F

CPU 2 DIMM 1G

CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 3H

CPU 2 DIMM 2H

CPU 2 DIMM 1H

CPU 2 DIMM 3G

H

PCH

H

CPU 1 DIMM 1A

CPU 1 DIMM 2A

CPU 1 DIMM 3B

CPU 1 DIMM 2B

CPU 1 DIMM 1B

CPU 1 DIMM 3A

H

CPU 1 DIMM 3D

CPU 1 DIMM 2D

CPU 1 DIMM 1C

CPU 1 DIMM 2C

CPU 1 DIMM 3C

CPU 1 DIMM 1D

K

L

1CN101J9

FAN

11/1

2

SYSSATA 1

SAS 1

SMB SAS

Front Panel

Front VGA

PWR 1

BP PWR

Front LAN M

CPU 2

CPU 1

FAN

9/10

SY

S

FAN

7/8

SYS

FAN

5/6

SYS

FAN

3/4

SYS

FAN

1/2

SYS

USB 1

Slot riser card / slot 1

Slot riser card / slot 4

F

Slot 3

Slot 2

F

F

K

K

K

K

K

UFM

PWR 2

SERIAL 1

1

B

C A

NC-SI

SKU Key

Page 336: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

336 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Appendix

The LEDs have the following meaning:

LED Indicator Meaning

A - Identification blue on server is identified via the ServerView Operations Manager

blue flashing local monitor off

B - CSS(Customer Self Service)

off no error (CSS component)

yellow on indicates a prefailure (CSS component)

yellow flashing indicates a failure (CSS component)

C - GEL(Global Error LED)

off no error (non CSS component)

orange on indicates a prefailure (non CSS component)

orange flashing indicates a failure of a non CSS component.Reasons for a failure may be:

– over temperature measured by one of the sensors

– sensor is defective– CPU error– software detected an error

F - Controller off PCI card okay

orange on PCI card failure (PCI card installed on riser card)

G - CPU off CPU okay

orange on CPU failure

H - Memory module

off memory module running

orange on memory module failure

I - iRMC off iRMC S4 inactive

green flashing iRMC S4 okay

K - Fans off fan running

orange on fan failure

L - Battery off battery running

orange on battery failure

Page 337: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 337

Appendix

17.2.1.3 I/O panel connectors

Figure 261: I/O panel connectors

No. Description

1 Shared LAN connector (for WOL/PXE/iSCSI function) (LAN1)

2 Standard LAN connector (LAN2)

3 Management LAN connector (for iRMC S4 server management function)

4 Global error indicator (orange), CSS indicator (yellow), ID indicator (blue); (description see preceding section)

5 Video connector (VGA)

6 3x USB connectors

Page 338: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

338 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Appendix

17.2.1.4 I/O panel indicators

Figure 262: I/O panel indicators

Indicator Status Description

1LAN speed indicator

yellow on traffic a transfer rate of 1 Gbit/s

green on traffic a transfer rate of 100 Mbit/s

off traffic a transfer rate of 10 Mbit/s

2LAN link / transfer indicator

green on LAN connection established

off no LAN connection

green flashing data transfer in progress

3

Global error indicator

off no critical event (non-CSS component)

orange onprefailure detected (non-CSS component)

orange flashing non CSS component failure

CSS indicator

off no critical event (CSS component)

yellow on prefailure detected (CSS component)

yellow flashing CSS component failure

ID indicatorblue on

server has been highlighted using ServerView Operations Manager, iRMC web frontend, or the ID button on the front panel for easy identification

blue flashing local monitor is not active

Page 339: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 339

Appendix

17.2.1.5 Indicators on power supply units

Figure 263: Indicator on the power supply unit

1 Indicator on the hot-plug power supply unit (two colors)

800 W power supply unit:

Flashes green when the server is switched off, but mains voltage is present (standby mode).

Lights up green when the server is switched on and functioning properly.

Flashes orange when a predictable error has been detected, but the power supply unit is still running.

Lights up orange if no mains voltage is present or the power supply unit has failed.

450 W power supply unit:

Flashes green when the server is switched off, but mains voltage is present (standby mode).

Lights up green when the server is switched on and functioning properly.

Lights up orange in case of OCP/OVP or when the fan of the power supply unit has failed.

Page 340: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

340 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Appendix

17.2.2 Indicators on the front panel

Figure 264: Indicators on the front panel

Local diagnostic indicators

I In addition to local diagnostic indicators, CSS or Global Error LEDs indicate, if the defective component is a customer replaceable unit or if a service technician needs to be dispatched to replace the part.

Pos. Indicator Status Description

1HDD / SSD error indicator

orange onHDD / SSD, SAS / SATA backplane or RAID controller failure detected

2PSU error indicator

orange on

Hot-plug PSU failure detected

I Only available in redundant PSU configurations.

3Temperature error indicator

orange onOperating temperature levels above permitted limits

4CPU error indicator

orange on CPU prefailure event detected

5Memory error indicator

orange on Memory module failure detected

6Fan error indicator

orange on Fan prefailure or failure event detected

Page 341: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 341

Appendix

Status indicators

Pos. Indicator Status Description

7 ID indicatorblue on

server has been highlighted using ServerView Operations Manager, iRMC web frontend, or the ID button on the front panel for easy identification

blue flashing local monitor is not active

8CSS indicator

off no critical event (CSS component)

yellow on prefailure detected (CSS component)

yellow flashing CSS component failure

9Global error indicator

off no critical event (non CSS component)

orange onprefailure detected (non CSS component)

orange flashing

non CSS component failure

10HDD / SSD activity indicator

green flashing data access in progress

Page 342: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

342 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Appendix

I The meaning of further buttons is described in the corresponding operating manual.

11Power-on indicator

green on server is switched on and running

orange on

server is switched off, but mains voltage is present (standby mode)

I After connecting the server to the mains it takes about 60 secondes until the server enters the standby mode.

With firmware version 7.3.x, two new operating conditions are indicated: iRMC booting and power-on delay.

yellow / orange flashing

iRMC booting

I After connecting the server to the mains (power cord plugged in / after mains failure) the iRMC will boot. The system cannot be switched on, until the iRMC boot sequence is complete. During this time, the power-on indicator will flash yellow/orange.

yellow on

Power-on delay

I After shutting down, the server cannot be switched on again right away. If the On/Off button is pressed right after shutting down the server, the power-on indicator will light up yellow until the delay period ends and the server will boot.

Pos. Indicator Status Description

Page 343: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 343

Appendix

17.3 Onboard settings

Figure 265: Jumper

iRMC

exte

rnal

con

nect

ors

INDICATECSS

TPM

LANCTRL

Battery

VGA

USB 2

USB 3

SharedLAN

LAN 2

ManagementLAN

Slot riser card / slot 2 and 3

CPU 2 DIMM 3F

CPU 2 DIMM 2F

CPU 2 DIMM 1E

CPU 2 DIMM 2E

CPU 2 DIMM 3E

CPU 2 DIMM 1F

CPU 2 DIMM 1G

CPU 2 DIMM 2G

CPU 2 DIMM 3H

CPU 2 DIMM 2H

CPU 2 DIMM 1H

CPU 2 DIMM 3G

PCH

CPU 1 DIMM 1A

CPU 1 DIMM 2A

CPU 1 DIMM 3B

CPU 1 DIMM 2B

CPU 1 DIMM 1B

CPU 1 DIMM 3A

CPU 1 DIMM 3D

CPU 1 DIMM 2D

CPU 1 DIMM 1C

CPU 1 DIMM 2C

CPU 1 DIMM 3C

CPU 1 DIMM 1D

1CN101J9

FAN

11/1

2

SYSSATA 1

SAS 1

SMB SAS

Front Panel

Front VGA

PWR 1

BP PWR

Front LAN M

CPU 2

CPU 1

FAN

9/10

SY

S

FAN

7/8

SYS

FAN

5/6

SYS

FAN

3/4

SYS

FAN

1/2

SYS

USB 1

Slot riser card / slot 1

Slot riser card / slot 4

Slot 3

Slot 2

UFM

PWR 2

SERIAL 1

1

NC-SI

SKU Key

Setting

CN101 Password Skip/Recovery BIOS

Jumper Description

J9 CMOS Clear

1Default

1Password Skipenabled 1

Recovery BIOSenabled

Default Clear CMOS

Jumper settings

1

Page 344: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

344 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Appendix

17.4 Minimum startup configuration

If the server does not start up or other problems occur, it may be necessary to take the system down to its most basic configuration in order to isolate the defective component.

The minimum startup configuration consists of the following components and cables:

Jumper Status Description

CN101

3-5 position: Normal operation (default) Password Clear and Recovery BIOS disabled

1-2 position: Password Clear enabled

5-6 position: Recovery BIOS enabled

J9

1-2 position: Normal operation (default)

2-3 position: Clear CMOS data and restore default settings

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)

Component Notes

System board no TPM, UFM or expansion cards installed

CPU with CPU heat sink installed in socket CPU 1

1 memory module installed in slot DIMM 1A

Front panel module

Power supply unit installed in bay 1

Table 6: Minimum startup configuration - components

Page 345: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

RX200 S8 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 345

Appendix

Ê "Shutting down the server" on page 46

Ê "Disconnecting the server from the mains" on page 47

Ê Take the system down to its minimum startup configuration.

Ê "Connecting the server to the mains" on page 57

Ê Connect a keyboard, mouse and display to the server.

Ê "Switching on the server" on page 58

V CAUTION!

Since the fan module is not included in the minimum startup configuration, the server must be shut down immediately after the diagnostic process is complete (POST phase has been passed).

The minimum startup configuration must be used exclusively for diagnostic purposes by maintenance personnel, never in daily operation!

Cable Notes

Front panel cable

Power cable

Table 7: Minimum startup configuration - cables

Page 346: PRIMERGY RX200 S8 - Fujitsu Technology Solutionsmanuals.ts.fujitsu.com/file/11453/rx200s8-umm-en.pdfUpgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8 These uses include control of nuclear reactions

346 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual RX200 S8

Appendix